Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
745i
745Li
760i
760Li
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you
with enhanced control and security when you drive it.
We therefore have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and famil-
iarize yourself with the information that we have compiled
for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains
important data and instructions intended to assist you in
gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's
unique range of technical features. The manual also con-
tains information on maintenance designed to enhance
operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of
your BMW throughout an extended service life.
This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent
part of this vehicle. It should stay with the vehicle when
sold to provide the next owner with important operating,
safety and maintenance information.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
© 2004 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 159 154
US English VIII/04, 6 146
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
3
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find specific topics is
to use the index, refer to page 218.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
17 Control Center
26 Voice command
Controls
34 Opening and closing
46 Adjustments
58 Transporting children safely
62 Driving
81 Everything under control
91 Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
100 Lamps
103 A congenial climate
112 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
122 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
130 Starting navigation system
132 Destination entry
139 Destination guidance
145 What to do if …
Entertainment
148 On/off, tone
152 Radio
158 CD Compact Disc
160 CD changer
163 TV
165 DVD changer
Communications
174 Using the phone in your vehicle
182 BMW Assist
Mobility
186 Refueling
188 Wheels and tires
194 Under the hood
198 Maintenance
200 Rules and regulations
201 Replacing components
209 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
214 Technical data
218 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
In compiling this Owner's Manual we have
made every effort to furnish you with a con-
venient reference source affording quick
access to all the essentials. The fastest way
to find detailed information on any specific
subject is to turn to the comprehensive
index at the back of the manual. For a brief
initial overview, please refer to the first
chapter.
Should the day come when you decide to
sell your BMW, please remember to make
certain that the new owner receives this
Owner's Manual; it is an important part of
the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
If you have any additional questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
You can find information on BMW, e.g.
technology, on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be
followed precisely in order to avoid
the possibility of personal injury and seri-
ous damage to the vehicle.
< Marks the end of a specific item of infor-
mation.
Contains information that will assist
you in gaining the optimum benefit
from your vehicle and enable you to care
more effectively for your vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken
to help protect the environment.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-
specific equipment and optional extras
when available.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the
voice command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by
the voice command system.
Vehicle Memory, Key Memory, refer
to page 56. Identifies functions that
can be specifically adapted for a particular
key or vehicle. These adjustments can be
performed either by yourself or by your
BMW center.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Man-
ual for information on a particular part or
assembly.
These sections contain information on
using the voice command system.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Your individual vehicle
On purchasing your BMW, you have
decided in favor of a model with individual-
ized equipment and features. This Owner's
Manual describes the entire array of
options and equipment available with a
specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may
contain information on accessories and
equipment that you have not specified for
your own vehicle. Sections describing
options and special equipment are marked
by asterisks
*
to assist you in identifying
possible differences between the descrip-
tions in this manual and your own vehicle's
equipment.
Should your BMW be equipped with fea-
tures or accessories not described in this
Owner's Manual, please consult the
enclosed Supplementary Owner's Man-
ual(s).
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous,
ongoing development that is conceived to
ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety
standards combined with advanced, state-
of-the-art technology.
For this reason, the features described in
this Owner's Manual may differ from those
on your vehicle. Nor can errors and omis-
sions be entirely ruled out. You are there-
fore asked to appreciate that no claims can
be entertained on the basis of the data,
illustrations or descriptions in this Owner's
Manual.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-perfor-
mance electronics, requires specially
adapted maintenance and repair methods.
Therefore, only have corresponding work
on your BMW carried out by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to
BMW repair procedures with correspond-
ingly trained personnel. If work is carried
out improperly there is a danger of conse-
quential damage and the related safety
risks.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine
parts and accessories approved by
BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested
and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW
Parts, you simultaneously acquire the
assurance that they have been thoroughly
tested by BMW to ensure optimized perfor-
mance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for dam-
age resulting from installation of parts and
accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by
other manufacturers to verify if it can be
used on a BMW safely and without risk to
either the vehicle, its operation, or its occu-
pants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories
and other products approved by BMW,
together with professional advice on using
these items, are available from all BMW
centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms,
radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels,
suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of
any mobile phone from within the vehicle
without using an externally mounted
antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkie, ham radio or
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Notes
6
similar accessories, may cause extensive
damage to the vehicle, compromise its
safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical
system or affect the validity of the BMW
Limited Warranty. Refer to your BMW cen-
ter for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair
of the emission control devices and
systems may be performed by any automo-
tive repair establishment or individual using
any certified automotive part.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publica-
tion thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following war-
ranties:
– New Vehicle Limited Warranty
– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
– Federal Emissions System Defect
Warranty
– Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
– California Emission Control System
Limited Warranty
Detailed information about these warran-
ties is listed in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models or in the
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Reporting safety defects
The following only applies to vehicles
owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O.
Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-
1227, Telephone (800) 831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or BMW of North
America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-
9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and
displays is intended to serve as a source
of orientation in your vehicle's operating
environment. The section will also assist
you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available
for operating the various systems.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
All around the steering wheel: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Roller sun blind for rear window
*
113
2 Rear window safety switch 44
3 Power windows 43
4 Exterior mirrors 53
5 Parking brake 64
6 Parking lamps and low beams 100
9 Steering wheel 16
10 Info Display 12
11 Automatic transmission lever 68
12 Ignition lock 62
16 Horn: the entire surface
20 Fog lamps 101
21 Unlocking the engine hood 194
7 Instrument lighting 101
8 Turn signals 71
High-beams,
headlamp flasher 101
Computer 85
Check Control 83
Computer 85
Standing lamps 101
13 Switching ignition on/off 62
and starting engine 63
14 Windshield wipers 72
Rain sensor 72
15 PDC Park Distance
Control
*
91
17 Steering wheel heater
*
54
Steering wheel adjustment 54
18 Unlocking luggage
compartment 40
19 Programmable cruise
control 73
Active cruise control
*
75
Front fog lamps
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Info Display
1 To view odometer display and reset trip
odometer to zero 81
2 Speedometer with display for
> Programmable cruise control 73
or
> Active cruise control
*
75
> Speed limit 87
3 Fixed indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 81
Destination guidance of navigation
system
*
139
5 Display for
> Computer 85
or
> Text message of the Check
Control 83
or
> Voice command system
*
26
6 Transmission range selection 68
7 Automatic transmission program
display 68
8 Display for
> Clock 90
> Outside temperature 81
or
> Variable indicator and warning
lamps 83
9 Computer with fuel gauge 85
10 Fog lamps 101
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning
lamps
Technology that monitors itself
The indicator and warning lamps identified
by the
+
symbol are subjected to an oper-
ation check each time you switch on the
ignition or start the engine. They each light
up once for different periods of time.
When a malfunction occurs in a monitored
system, the corresponding lamp will either
fail to go out when the engine is started, or
it will come on again during normal driving.
Detailed information is provided on the
specified pages.
Fixed indicator and warning lamps
Colors
The indicator and warning lamps can light
up in different colors and combinations.
> Red:
Stop the vehicle immediately
or
an important reminder
> Red and yellow:
Continue to drive; drive cautiously
> Yellow:
Have the system inspected at the earli-
est opportunity
or
for your information
> Green:
For your information
> Blue:
For your information.
Variable indicator and warning lamps
In the display 8 of the Info Display, addi-
tional indicator and warning lamps appear
when necessary. Observe the instructions
for action of the accompanying Check Con-
trol messages, also refer to page 83.
Please fasten safety belts
+
51
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
+
93
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 93
ABS Antilock Brake System
+
92
Brake system
+
With other warning lamps 94, 197
Warning lamp on Canadian models
With parking brake released 66
With parking brake set 64
Warning lamp on Canadian models
Automatic parking brake,
Automatic Hold
+
65, 66
Service Engine Soon
+
200
Indicator lamp on Canadian
models
Airbags
+
98
Turn signals 71
High beams/
headlamp flasher 101
Front fog lamps 101
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Comfort area: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Glasses compartment 116
2 Storage compartment 116
3 Switching audio and video sources on/
off and adjusting volume 149
4 Telephone keypad, folding 176
5 Automatic air distribution and supply,
left side of passenger
compartment 104
6 Outside air/AUC Automatic recircu-
lated-air control/Recirculated air 105
7 Defrosting windshield and windows and
removing condensation 105
8 Control Display 17
9 Temperature, left side of passenger
compartment: turn
For maximum cooling: press 105
10 Glass roof, electric
*
44
11 Memory keys for integrated universal
remote control
*
112
12 Air supply, left side of passenger com-
partment: turn
To switch off automatic climate control:
press 105, 107
13 Reading lamps 102
14 Hazard warning flashers
15 Interior lamps 102
16 Air supply on right side of passenger
compartment 104
17 Temperature, right side of passenger
compartment: turn
For residual heat utilization: press 105
18 Rear window defroster
19 Air conditioning 105
20 Starting an emergency call 177
21 Opening the glove compartment
22 Automatic air distribution and supply,
right side of passenger
compartment 107
23 Station/track search and CD
*
, TV
*
and DVD
*
148
24 Central locking system 38
25 Controller 17
26 Control Center buttons 17
27 Seat adjustment 47
Heated seats
*
52
Active seat ventilation
*
52
Active seat for driver
*
53
Seat, mirror and steering wheel
memory 55
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Cockpit
16
Buttons on steering wheel
Buttons are integrated in the steering
wheel for fast operation of the following
functions without being distracted from
driving:
> The Steptronic of the automatic trans-
mission
> Selected audio source functions
> Selected portable phone functions
> The voice command system
> Selected TV and DVD functions.
The buttons on the steering wheel are
only operational when the corre-
sponding systems are switched on.<
Telephone:
Accept call, make calls, end call
Volume
Voice command system
*
:
Switch on and off
Fast forward/reverse:
> Radio
Press briefly: next stored station
Extended pressure: automatic tuning
> CD
*
Press briefly: skipping tracks
Extended pressure: fast forward/
reverse
> TV
*
Select station
> DVD
*
Search for chapter
Available for individual programming:
Programming button function, refer to
page 54.
Steptronic:
Press briefly to proceed through a selection
sequence consisting of the automatic pro-
gram, the Sport program, and the manual
mode, refer to page 68.
Steptronic: upshifting and downshifting,
refer to page 70.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Control Center
The concept
The Control Center has been designed to
avoid the unnecessary complexity created
by an extended number of switches and
controls. It consists of the controller and
the Control Display.
The controller is used to select the func-
tions that will appear on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, it also shows you the
Check Control messages, refer to page 83.
Controls
1 Controller: you operate all the functions
in the Control Center by moving, turning
and pressing.
If you move the controller
> you feel the mechanical guides along
the main direction of movement.
This makes it easier for you to select
the right main menus
> If you turn the controller, you feel an
electronically created rasterizing.
This helps you to select the desired
menu item
2 Button for opening the start menu from
any menu item
3 Individual button assignment
To avoid posing an unnecessary haz-
ard, both to your own vehicle's occu-
pants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make adjust-
ments unless traffic and road conditions
allow.<
The following introduction illustrates how
easy it is to use the Control Center.
You can find detailed instructions describ-
ing how to use the individual systems in the
separate sections.
Programming button function
You can assign specific individual functions
to the programmable button. This feature
then provides you with quick access to this
function, allowing you to control it without
undue distraction from road and traffic con-
ditions.
1. Select "Settings" and press the control-
ler
2. Select and press the controller
3. Select . Continue to press the
controller until the desired function
appears:
> "Mode"
You can choose between the output
sources radio/FM or AM, compact-
disc CD and CD changer. The pre-
condition is that one of these
sources has been activated
> "FM" or "AM"
Switching over between wavebands
FM and AM, also refer to page 152
> "Brief info"
Display of the help and supplemen-
tary texts of the active menu for
approx. 10 seconds, refer to Assis-
tance window on page 22.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Control Center
18
Select button. Continue to press
the controller until the desired function
appears.
The "Brief info" function is not avail-
able in the rear.<
Control Display
To open the start menu:
Press the button
or
move the controller
> toward the currently active menu
> twice in one direction.
To switch off the Control Display, press the
controller when you are in the start menu.
When the Control Display appears,
you see the start menu for approx.
5 seconds, then the last active menu. You
can have the display of the start menu
deactivated at your BMW center.<
Selecting menu
Move the controller to select a menu, here:
"Settings".
The menu appears on the screen as soon
as you release the controller.
You can change directly to a different
menu by moving the controller in the
desired direction.<
Selecting menu items
Turn the controller to select the
menu item, here: "Clock".
Confirming selection or entry
Press the controller to confirm
the selection, here: "Clock".
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Select the desired setting for adjustment
from the menu item, here: "Time" and con-
firm your entry.
Settings
The first setting option for time is activated.
> Turn the controller to make the adjust-
ment
> Press the controller to confirm the new
setting, i.e. to store it, and to proceed to
the next highlighted position to adjust.
Changing menu page
You can select individual pages in specific
menus, here: "Climate".
Select the symbol and press the controller:
To select the second page of the menu
To return to the first page of the menu.
Symbols and lists
The symbols in the corners and edges of
the Control Display have various functions:
1 Corner symbols:
These symbols take you to the next
menu item or in a displayed list.
To do so: turn the controller
2 List symbols:
Indicates that you can only move within
the displayed list, here: stored radio
stations.
Turn the controller to select an entry
from the list.
To exit the list again:
Select and confirm your selec-
tion.
You can also leave the list by turning the
controller to the left or right
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Control Center
20
Symbols
To select the second page
To return to the first page
To exit from the list
To transfer the current display to
the assistance window. For more
detailed information on the assis-
tance window, refer to page 22
To transmit vehicle data to BMW
Service Center
To set display units and formats,
refer to page 89
To change the language of the dis-
play texts, refer to page 89
To select settings for vehicle func-
tions
Programmable function key, refer to
page 54
Programmable function key, refer to
page 17
To set the brightness of the screen,
refer to page 90
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Menus in Control Display
You can select from an extended range of
functions and setting options:
1 BMW Assist
*
182
2 Communication
> Using the phone 174
> Portable phone, refer to separate
Owner's Manual
3 Car data
> Computer 85
> Limit 87
> Stopwatch 88
> Service required 82
> Accessing Check Control
messages 83
4 Navigation
*
130
5 Help
> Brief help text displays 22
> Menu name for menu change
6 Entertainment
> Radio 152
> CD player
*
158
> CD changer
*
160
> TV
*
163
> DVD
*
165
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Control Center
22
7 Settings
> Vehicle functions 54, 65, 91
> Time and date 90
> Language 89
> Units of measure and display
format 89
> Brightness 90
> Lock Control Center in rear
*
24
8 Climate
> Automatic climate control 103
> Heated seats
*
52
> Independent ventilation 110
Assistance window*
While you use the Control Center, the
assistance window can provide you with a
parallel display for the active system.
You can use it for displays of the following:
> Short help and supplementary informa-
tion texts for selected menu items
> A function selected in the "Car data"
menu, refer to page 89
> The route for vehicles with a navigation
system, refer to page 131.
Help texts in assistance window
You can call up and also cancel displays
containing help texts and supplementary
information on selected menu items in the
assistance window.
1. Select "Help" from the start menu
2. Select "Brief info" and confirm your
selection. The help texts appear in the
assistance window
3. Confirm again to hide the automatic
display.
Showing menu name
You can program the system to display the
menu name each time you proceed to a
new menu.
1. Select "Help" from the start menu
2. Select "Menu name" and confirm your
selection.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Top and bottom status lines
1 Hands-free mode active
2 Display field for calls received in
absence
3 Portable phone reception strength
4 Display field
> of the telephone provider
> of the entered/selected phone num-
ber
5 Telephone status
> Green: incoming or outgoing call
> Red: no network available
> Lit up yellow:
The network of another provider is
being used, partner network
Flashing yellow:
The network of another provider is
being used, external network
Roaming in a partner or external
network entails higher call
charges than in your home network.<
6 Traffic Message Channel activated, cur-
rently not available
7 Display of Check Control 83
> Yellow: priority 2, the symbol flashes
briefly. You can use the "Car data"
menu to have the status report
shown on the Control Display
> Red: priority 1, these messages
appear immediately, accompanied
by a gong and a flashing symbol
Status service requirement display 82
> Red: at least one service interval has
been exceeded
8 Temperature selection display, right
side of passenger compartment
9 Air supply, right side of passenger com-
partment
10 Entertainment: display for radio, CD,
TV, DVD
11 Air supply, left side of passenger com-
partment
12 Temperature selection display, left side
of passenger compartment
Assistance window
The status lines in the assistance window
show the following:
> Outside temperature
> Navigation system destination
> Time
> Date.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Control Center
24
Control Center in rear*
Rear screen
Folding open rear screen:
1. Swing folding arm upward until it
engages
2. Fold open rear screen.
The rear screen is ready for operation.
Folding down rear screen:
1. Align rear screen straight
2. Fold rear screen downward; folding arm
unlocks
3. Swing folding arm downward.
Swing the rear screen downward
when the ski bag is used, as other-
wise it could be damaged.
Do not swing the rear screen up or down
with the cup holders open, as otherwise it
could be damaged.<
The rear screen switches off automat-
ically when it is swung downward.
Some functions are not available on the
rear screen, e.g. the BMW Assist function
can only be operated in the front Control
Display. Some functions only permit limited
operation on the rear screen, e.g. the
speed limit can only be displayed. Setting
is carried out via the front controller, refer
to page 87.<
Controller/buttons
The controller and buttons are located on
the center armrest.
Rear lock
The available functions are operated with
the respective controller.
In the Control Center, you can limit or deac-
tivate operation of the rear screen.
1. Select "Settings" and confirm your
selection
2. Select "Rear" and confirm your selec-
tion
3. Set operation of rear screen:
> Select "Limited Release" and con-
firm to lock the functions used in the
front Control Display
When headphones are con-
nected, all audio and video func-
tions continue to be selectable in the
rear, with the exception of the audio or
video source activated in the front Con-
trol Display.<
> Select "None Release" and confirm
to switch off the rear screen
> Select "Full Release" and confirm to
switch off all locks
> Select "Release" and confirm to
switch individual menus on or off:
Communication: select "Comm." and
confirm your selection.
Entertainment: select "Entertainm." and
confirm your selection.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
25
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Headphones
1 Headphone jack
2 Adjusting volume
3 Station scan/track search
> Station scan
> Music track search for CD, search
chapter for DVD changer
> Select TV channels
Headphones are only intended for passen-
gers in the rear seats. Please check with
local regulations regarding use of head-
phones.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Voice command
26
Voice command
Voice command system
The concept
The voice command system allows you to
control operation of various vehicle sys-
tems without ever removing your hands
from the steering wheel. The system oper-
ates on the basis of voice commands that
you will learn easily after using them a few
times. In many cases, the voice command
system supports you with announcements
or questions while you are making your
entries.
The voice command system transforms
your oral commands and dialog answers
into control signals for the selected sys-
tems.
Please take the time to acquaint your-
self with how a particular system
operates before proceeding to control it
using the voice command system.<
Symbols used
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the
voice command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by
the voice command system.
Systems available for use with voice
command
> {Telephone}, refer to page 174
> {Navigation}, refer to page 130
> {Radio}, refer to page 152
> {CD}, refer to page 158
> {CD changer}, refer to page 160
> {Notepad}, refer to page 28
> {TV}, refer to page 163
> {DVD}, refer to page 165.
Either the system that you are now operat-
ing or any current error messages will
appear in the Info Display, refer to page 27.
Voice commands
Voice command system activation
Briefly press the button on the steer-
ing wheel.
A signal tone and "SVS active" in the Info
Display, refer to page 27, indicate that the
system is ready for use. You are automati-
cally in the main menu.
From here, you can call up all the equip-
ment that can be operated.
Canceling voice command
Briefly press the button on the steer-
ing wheel
or
In dialogs in which any text can be spoken,
e.g. names, notes, canceling is only possi-
ble using the button.
The system automatically switches
over to its telephone mode if you
receive a call during voice command.
"SVS off" appears in the Info Display, refer
to page 27.<
Voice commands
The voice command system operates on
the basis of specific, predefined com-
mands; these commands should be spo-
ken precisely as indicated. You can have
the possible commands read back at any
stage. To do so, say the command
{Options}.
In addition to the commands described,
there are often other commands that run
the same function. Instead of {Options},
you can, for example, also say {What now}.
*
These sections contain information on
using the voice command system.
{Cancel}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
27
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
More detailed commands such as
{Change scale} instead of {Scale} are also
often possible.
Short commands
With the {Main menu} level, you can run
certain functions directly with brief com-
mands, refer to page 29, without having to
open an equipment level.
For example, if you want to dial a phone
number, you do not have to say
rather you can say directly
Special commands
Special commands are available for spe-
cific systems. In this Owner's Manual you
will find these commands in the sections
describing the individual systems.
Displays in Info Display
The Info Display shows you what the voice
command system has understood in line 2,
while also indicating which voice command
or question is currently active in line 1.
In addition, any error messages are also
displayed.
Selecting navigation scale – an example
Start the dialog:
Briefly press in the steering wheel.
Volume adjustment
You can adjust the volume for the instruc-
tions from the voice command system:
Turn the button during an instruction/
announcement to select the desired vol-
ume.
Instructions/announcements from the
voice command system will continue at this
volume level, even if the other audio
sources are set to minimum volume.
The system automatically selects your
individual volume setting each time
you unlock the vehicle using your personal
remote control.<
{Telephone}
1. {Dial number}
2. Enter the phone number.
Operation with the voice command sys-
tem is always indicated with this picto-
graph.
You say The voice command system replies Info Display screen contents
"SVS active"
{Change scale}{{Please enter the desired scale}} "scale ?
change scale"
{Scale
500 feet}
"ok
500 ft"
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Voice command
28
Notes
Do not use the voice command sys-
tem to make emergency calls. Your
voice and habitual tone could be affected
by stressful situations, as a result of which
the process of establishing the telephone
connection could be unnecessarily
delayed. Instead, use the emergency call
button near the interior rearview mirror,
refer to page 177.<
Environmental conditions
The voice command system uses a special
hands-free microphone located in the front
of your vehicle's headliner. Although the
system is designed to filter out ambient
noise, you can help ensure that your com-
mands will be understood by observing the
following instructions:
> Speak smoothly and clearly, at a normal
volume. Do not place any unusual
stress on individual syllables, and avoid
pauses
> Do not speak while the voice command
system is talking
> Keep the doors, windows and glass
roof closed to prevent interference from
ambient noise
> Avoid other sources of noise in the vehi-
cle while speaking, and ask other vehi-
cle occupants to refrain from talking
while you are using the system
> The hands-free microphone is aimed
toward the driver. This means that the
system might not be able to register the
voices of other vehicle occupants prop-
erly.
The notepad
Recording a note
You can store approx. ten minutes of spo-
ken text, either as a single entry or as mul-
tiple entries of any desired length.
To terminate recording:
Press button for a long period.
When recording notes, the voice
command system does not respond
to the {Cancel} command. The text check-
ing function for command words is deacti-
vated i n this c ase s o that you ca n sp eak any
desired text for your notes. This feature
saves you from having to concentrate on
avoiding any command words.<
Listening to a notebook entry
To listen to recorded notebook entries:
Deleting notes
Clearing notebook
To delete all contents from the notebook:
{Record note}.
1. {Read out}.
Approximately the first 3 seconds
of the first note are read aloud
2. Following the inquiry {{Note and
next?}} select the desired function
> To listen to the entire note:
{Read out}
> To hear the next notebook entry:
{Next}
> To hear the entry again:
{Back} or
{Repeat}.
1. {Edit}
2. {Delete}.
1. {Notepad}
2. {Delete}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
At a glance
29
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Standard commands
The standard commands available for use
with all controlled systems are the same.
On delivery, the {Standard dialog} is
set to simplify familiarization with the
voice command system.<
Short commands
Notebook
Navigation
Function Command
To repeat last message issued by the voice
command system
{Repeat}
To terminate the voice command system {Cancel}
To set comprehensive instructions and error
reports
{Standard dialog}
To set brief instructions and error reports {Short dialog}
To call up information on individual items of
equipment
{Help}
Provides you with a listing of the commands
available for the selected system. A corre-
sponding list simultaneously appears in the
Info Display, refer to page 27
{Options}
To open the main menu {Main menu}
Function Command
To record a note {Record note}
To listen to notebook entry {Read out note}
Function Command
To switch on the voice instructions {Message on}
To switch off the voice instructions {Message off}
To select destination from address book {Select destination}
To change scale {Scale}
To start the destination guidance {Route guidance on}
To call up information on the current position
or destination
{Information}
To request addresses {Address book}
To open the map view {Map}
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Voice command
30
Entertainment
Telephone
Function Command
To switch on radio {Radio on}
To switch off audio sources and TV {Audio off}
To select FM waveband {FM}
To select AM waveband {AM}
To select radio stations {Frequency selection}
To select a stored radio station {Station}
To start CD {CD on}
To select a CD {CD 1 ..6}
To start TV {TV on}
To start DVD {DVD on}
To select a DVD {DVD 1 ..6}
Function Command
To dial telephone number {Dial number}
To redial {Redial}
To select from the phone book {Dial name}
To make a new entry in the phone book {Save name}
To have the entries of the phone book read
out
{Read out telephone book}
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you
with information for complete control
of your vehicle. Its extensive array of
features and accessories, both for driving
and for your own safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Opening and closing
Key/remote control
1 Remote controls with integrated key.
They specify the functions of the Key
Memory. Individual functions of your
vehicle may behave differently depend-
ing on the remote control used.
To differentiate, you can mark the
remote controls using the color-coded
decals you received on taking delivery
of the vehicle
There is an extended-life battery
in every remote control which is
charged automatically in the ignition
lock as you drive.
If you have any remote control units that
are not being used on a regular basis,
you should therefore remember to
recharge these units by using them to
drive the vehicle for an extended period
at least once every six months, also
refer to page 36.
With Comfort Access, there is a battery
in every remote control. For instructions
on changing batteries, refer to
page 37.<
2 Spare key for storage in a safe place,
such as in your wallet. This key is not
intended for constant use
3 Adapter for spare key
The adapter can be used to store the
spare key. It can be stored in the place
provided within the luggage compart-
ment lid-mounted onboard tool kit to
ensure that it will always be available,
refer to page 201. You can find more
detailed information on using the
adapter in the section Using the spare
key adapter
Removing key from remote control
Press button 1 to release the key.
You can use the integrated key to unlock
and lock the following:
> The storage compartment under the
front armrest
> The driver's door
> The luggage compartment lid.
Within the storage compartment you will
also find the switch for locking the luggage
compartment separately, refer to page 40.
If you lock the storage compartment and
only turn over the remote control, no
access is possible via the luggage com-
partment lid. This is an advantage in a
hotel, for example.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Using the spare key adapter
You will need the adapter to activate the
ignition and to start the vehicle with the
spare key.
Press lock button 1, slide up the cover and
insert the spare key 2 in the adapter. Close
the cover and insert the adapter in the igni-
tion lock.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for
operation whenever the driver's door is
closed. This simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door.
The central locking system can be oper-
ated from the outside
> via the remote control
> via the driver's door lock
> with Comfort Access via the door
handle
and from inside via the button for the cen-
tral locking system.
When the system is locked from inside, the
fuel filler door remains unlocked. Refer to
page 38.
The anti-theft system is automatically acti-
vated whenever you activate the central
locking system from outside the vehicle.
The alarm system is armed/disarmed at the
same time.
In an accident, the central locking system
automatically unlocks the vehicle. In addi-
tion, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps switch on.
Opening and closing:
from outside
Using remote control
When you engage/release the vehicle's
locks, you simultaneously activate/deacti-
vate the anti-theft system, arm/disarm the
alarm system
and switch the interior lamps
on/off.
In addition, the remote control offers you
another function:
> Panic mode
In case of danger, you can trigger an
alarm.
You can have various confirmation
signals programmed into the system
to verify that the vehicle has been locked
securely.<
Protect remote control against unau-
thorized use, e.g. by handing over
only the remote control without an inte-
grated key when leaving the vehicle for
valet parking etc., refer to page 34.<
For additional details on alarm system,
refer to page 42.
Remote control
1 Unlock, convenience opening mode
and alarm system
2 Lock and secure, switch off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion sensor,
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
switch on interior lamps and door-
mounted proximity lamps
3 Open luggage compartment lid
4 Switch on interior lamps and pathway
lighting, activate panic mode
Because any persons or animals left
unattended in a parked vehicle could
lock the doors from the inside, you should
always keep the remote control with you;
this precaution ensures that you will remain
able to unlock the vehicle from the outside
at all times.<
When it is no longer possible to lock
the vehicle via the remote control, the
battery is discharged. Use this remote con-
trol during an extended drive; this will
recharge the battery, refer to page 34.
In the event of a system malfunction,
please contact your BMW center, which is
also your source for replacement keys.<
Releasing
Press button 1 .
The interior lamps and the door-mounted
proximity lamps come on.
Press the button once to unlock the driver's
door only; press a second time to unlock all
remaining doors as well as the luggage
compartment lid and the fuel filler door.
Convenience opening mode
Briefly press button 1 and then hold
down.
The windows and the glass roof open.
The glass roof will not be retracted if it is
already in its raised position.
Locking and securing
Press button 2 .
Switching on interior lamps and
door-mounted proximity lamps
If the vehicle is locked, press
button 2 .
Switching on interior lamps
Press button 4 .
You can also use this function to locate
your vehicle in parking garages etc.
Panic mode*
By pressing and holding button 4 for
more than approx. two seconds, you can
trigger the alarm system
*
in response to
any impending danger.
To switch off the alarm: press any of the
buttons.
Opening luggage compartment lid
Briefly press button 3 .
The luggage compartment lid opens,
regardless of whether it was previously
locked or unlocked.
During opening, the luggage com-
partment lid pivots upward and to the
rear. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
To avoid being inadvertently locked out,
never lay the remote control down in the
luggage compartment. If the vehicle is
locked, the luggage compartment lid is also
locked again when closed.<
Automatic luggage compartment lid
operation*
Opening luggage compartment lid
Briefly press button 3 .
The luggage compartment lid opens all the
way, regardless of whether it was previ-
ously locked or unlocked.
To interrupt the opening process:
Press the button again while opening is in
progress.
During opening, the luggage com-
partment lid pivots upward and to the
rear. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
To avoid being inadvertently locked out,
never lay the remote control down in the
luggage compartment. If the vehicle is
locked, the luggage compartment lid is also
locked again when closed.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Malfunction
The remote control can be subjected to
malfunctions by local radio waves.
Should the remote control fail to operate
owing to interference of this kind, the vehi-
cle can be opened and closed via the door
lock with the integrated key.
When it is no longer possible to lock the
vehicle via the remote control, the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during
an extended drive; this will recharge the
battery, refer to page 34.
Comfort Access*
Carry the remote control on your person if
you want to use the Comfort Access.
Unlocking
> Pull a door handle or
> press the button on the outside of the
luggage compartment lid.
Only the door of the door handle you
have pulled is opened.
You unlock the other doors from the inside
using the central locking system button,
refer to page 38.<
Locking and securing
With the driver's door closed, press a door
handle.
You can have various confirmation
signals programmed into the system
to verify that the vehicle has been locked
securely.<
If a remote control is detected in the
interior, the vehicle is unlocked again
or not locked in the first place.<
Opening luggage compartment lid
Press the button on the outside of the lug-
gage compartment lid, refer to page 39.
During opening, the luggage com-
partment lid pivots upward and to the
rear. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
If a remote control is detected in the lug-
gage compartment after the luggage com-
partment lid has been closed, the luggage
compartment lid opens again.<
Changing battery
Replace the battery if it is no longer possi-
ble to unlock or lock the vehicle.
1. Take the key out of the remote control,
refer to page 34
2. Press in the detent, refer to arrow 1,
e.g. with the key
3. Remove the cover of the battery com-
partment, refer to arrow 2
4. Insert a battery of the same type with
the positive side facing upwards
5. Press the cover to close it.
Return used batteries to a recycling
point or your BMW center.<
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply
with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communi-
cation Commission regulations. Operation
is governed by the following:
FCC ID: LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
> This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
> this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void
the user's authority to operate this equip-
ment.<
Using key
One turn of the key in the driver's door lock
unlocks the driver's door only.
Turning the key a second time unlocks all of
the remaining doors, the luggage compart-
ment lid and the fuel filler door.
You can have various confirmation
signals programmed into the system
to verify that the vehicle has been locked
securely.<
Convenience operation
You also have the option of operating the
windows and the glass roof from the
driver's door lock.
> To open:
With the door closed, turn the key to the
'Unlock' position and hold it there
> To close:
With the door closed, turn the key to the
'Lock' position and hold it there.
Watch during the closing process to
be sure that no one is injured. Releas-
ing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
If an electrical defect occurs, you can
unlock or lock the driver's door with the key
in the end positions of the door lock.
Opening and closing:
from inside
You can operate the central locking system
with this button when the driver's door is
closed. The doors and luggage compart-
ment lid are unlocked or locked
only. The anti-theft alarm system is not
activated.
Also, the fuel filler door remains unlocked
to allow refueling.
If the remote control, refer to page 36,
or Comfort Access, refer to page 37,
have been used to unlock only the driver's
door and you press the button when
the driver's door is open, the other doors,
the luggage compartment lid, and the fuel
filler door are unlocked.
If the driver's door is closed, pressing
the button locks it.<
You can also have the system pro-
grammed to activate the central lock-
ing system automatically whenever the
vehicle is set in motion, or when a specific
interval elapses after it is unlocked, pro-
vided that neither the doors nor the lug-
gage compartment lid are opened in the
meantime. This can be adjusted to be key-
specific.<
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together with
the button for the central locking sys-
tem and then pull the release handle
above the armrest or
> pull the release handle for each door
twice: the first pull unlocks the door,
and the second one opens it.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
When the low beams are switched on,
the interior door handles are also
lighted. The intensity of the lighting is
adjusted using the instrument lighting con-
trol, refer to page 101.<
Engaging locks
> Use the central locking button to lock all
of the doors simultaneously, or
> press the individual safety lock buttons
down. To prevent the driver from being
inadvertently locked out of the vehicle,
the lock button on the driver's door
automatically extends again after a brief
period if the door remains open.
Because any persons or animals left
unattended in a parked vehicle could
lock the doors from the inside, you should
always keep the remote control with you;
this precaution ensures that you will remain
able to unlock the vehicle from the outside
at all times.<
Doors
Automatic soft closing*
Apply gentle pressure to the door to close
it. The closing process will then be carried
out automatically.
To avoid injuries, ensure that the
door's travel path is completely free
and clear before closing.<
Luggage compartment lid
Opening from outside
Press button. The luggage compartment lid
opens.
During opening, the luggage com-
partment lid pivots upward and to the
rear. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
The lock
All of the vehicle's keys fit the luggage
compartment lid lock located in the license
plate recess.
Opening separately
Insert the key in the luggage compartment
lid's lock and turn it all the way to the right
– the lid opens.
To avoid being locked out inadvert-
ently, avoid laying the remote control
down in the luggage compartment. The
luggage compartment is locked again as
soon as you close the lid.
If you use the key to unlock the luggage
compartment lid while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm will be triggered. Switch-
ing off the alarm, refer to page 42.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
Locking separately
The switch position will vary according to
the individual vehicle's equipment level.
1 Luggage compartment lid locked
2 Luggage compartment lid unlocked
Push the switch into position 1. This locks
the luggage compartment lid and discon-
nects it from the central locking system.
If you then lock the storage compartment
in the center armrest before handing over
only the remote control when leaving the
vehicle for valet parking, etc., this will pre-
vent unauthorized access to the vehicle
through the luggage compartment, refer to
page 34. This is an advantage in a hotel, for
example.
Manual operation
If an electrical defect occurs, refer to
Opening separately.
Opening from inside
You can use this button to open the lug-
gage compartment lid when the vehicle is
stationary. This is not possible, if the lug-
gage compartment lid has been locked
separately.
Closing
A recess has been incorporated into the
inside trim on the luggage compartment lid
to make it easier to pull down.
Comfort Access*
If a remote control is detected in the
luggage compartment after the lug-
gage compartment lid has been closed, the
luggage compartment lid opens automati-
cally.
During opening the luggage compartment
lid pivots upward and to the rear. Ensure
that adequate clearance is available before
opening.<
Automatic soft closing
To close the luggage compartment lid,
merely press it down gently. The closing
process will then be carried out automati-
cally.
To avoid personal injury, always
ensure that no individuals are within
the luggage compartment lid's travel range
when closing.<
Operate the vehicle only when the
luggage compartment lid is com-
pletely closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes
could penetrate the interior of the vehicle.<
If special circumstances should make it
absolutely necessary to operate the vehicle
with the luggage compartment lid open:
> Close all windows and the glass roof
> Adjust the automatic climate control's
blower to supply a high rate of airflow,
refer to page 105.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic luggage compartment lid
operation*
Opening
The luggage compartment lid opens all the
way, when you
> press the button next to the steering
column
> press the button on the outside of the
luggage compartment lid, refer to
page 39
> press button 3 on the remote
control, refer to page 36.
During opening, the luggage com-
partment lid pivots upward and to the
rear. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
Closing
The luggage compartment lid closes auto-
matically when you
> press the button or
> press the button on the outside of the
luggage compartment lid, refer to
page 39.
The luggage compartment lid imme-
diately stops opening or closing if you
hold it in place by hand.<
To avoid injuries, be sure that the
travel path of the luggage compart-
ment lid is clear when it is closed, as with
all closing procedures.
Operate the vehicle only when the luggage
compartment lid is completely closed.
Otherwise, exhaust fumes could penetrate
the interior of the vehicle. If special circum-
stances should make it absolutely neces-
sary to operate the vehicle with the luggage
compartment lid open:
> Close all windows and the glass roof
> Adjust the automatic climate control's
blower to supply a high rate of airflow,
refer to page 105.<
Automatic closing of the luggage
compartment lid is not activated in
your vehicle. If you desire, you can have
this function set.<
Comfort Access*
If a remote control is detected in the
luggage compartment after the lug-
gage compartment lid has been closed, the
luggage compartment lid opens automati-
cally.
During opening the luggage compartment
lid pivots upward and to the rear. Ensure
that adequate clearance is available before
opening.<
Manual operation
In the case of an electrical defect, you can
unlock the luggage compartment lid with
the key, refer to page 39, and slowly open
and close it without sudden movements.
Emergency release
This lever releases the luggage compart-
ment lid from inside the luggage compart-
ment.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
Luggage compartment
Net*
You can use the net to store smaller objects
on the bulkhead separating the luggage
compartment from the rear seats.
Do not stow objects behind the side
trim panels on the left and right in the
luggage compartment, as otherwise the
electrical parts could overheat and be dam-
aged.<
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood, or the luggage
compartment lid is opened
> To movement in the vehicle interior:
interior motion sensor
> To changing the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruption of battery voltage.
The system responds to unauthorized vehi-
cle entry and attempted theft by simulta-
neously activating:
> An acoustic alarm, which lasts for a
period of approx. 30 seconds
> The hazard warning flashers for approx.
five minutes
> The high beams, which flash on and off
in the same rhythm.
Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or at the door lock,
the alarm system is armed or disarmed at
the same time.
The system indicates that it has been cor-
rectly armed by switching on the hazard
warning flashers for a single cycle and by
emitting an acoustic signal.
You can have different acknowledg-
ment signals set to confirm arming
and disarming.<
You can also open the luggage compart-
ment lid with the system armed using
button 3 on the remote control, refer
to page 36. When you close the lid, the sys-
tem is rearmed.
Unlocking vie the door lock will trigger
the alarm on some national-market
versions.
Pressing the 'Panic mode' button for a
longer period also triggers the alarm, refer
to page 36.<
Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote
control, refer to page 36
> or insert the remote control all the way
into the ignition lock, engaging the
detent.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp below the interior
rearview mirror flashes continuously:
the system is armed
> The indicator lamp flashes when the
system is vehicle is locked: door(s) or
tailgate are not completely closed. Even
if you do not close the alerted area, the
system begins to monitor the remaining
areas, and the indicator lamp flashes
continuously after 10 seconds. How-
ever, the interior motion sensor is not
activated
> The indicator lamp goes out when the
vehicle is unlocked: no manipulation or
attempted intrusions have been
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
detected in the period since the system
was armed
> If the indicator lamp flashes after you
unlock the vehicle before the remote
control is inserted in the ignition lock,
but for no more than roughly 5 minutes:
an attempted entry has been detected
in the period since the system was
armed.
Following triggering of an alarm, the indica-
tor lamp will flash continuously.
Tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The
alarm system reacts, e.g. in case of an
attempted wheel theft or towing.
Interior motion sensor
In order for the interior motion sensor to
function properly, the windows and glass
roof must be completely closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor may be switched off at the same
time. This prevents unintentional alarms,
e.g. in the following situations:
> In duplex garages
> When transporting on car-carrying
trains
> When animals are to remain in the
vehicle.
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press button 2 on the remote
control twice consecutively.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor
and the interior motion sensor are switched
off up to the next unlocking and locking
actions.
If you wish, the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor will be perma-
nently deactivated. Please contact your
BMW center for assistance.<
Windows
Opening and closing windows
From radio mode on:
> Press the switch up to the resistance
point:
The window continues to move down-
ward as long as you continue to hold
the switch
> Briefly press the switch beyond the
resistance point:
The window moves downward auto-
matically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same
manner by pulling the switch.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the power windows:
> For approx. 15 minutes with the remote
control in the radio mode
> For approx. 1 minute in position 0 or
with the remote control disengaged.
To open, press the switch beyond the
resistance point.
When leaving the vehicle parked,
remove the remote control from the
ignition lock and close the doors; this pre-
caution prevents children from operating
the power windows and injuring them-
selves etc.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Opening and closing
44
For information on using the convenience
operation at the door lock or with the
remote control, refer to page 36 or 38.
Anti-trapping mechanism
If the force rises beyond a predefined
threshold during closing, the system will
stop moving the window prior to lowering it
slightly.
Despite the anti-trapping mechanism
you should inspect the window's
travel path prior to closing it, as the safety
system might fail to detect certain kinds of
obstructions, such as very thin objects, and
the window would continue closing.
The protection provided by the anti-trap-
ping mechanism is limited when the switch
is pulled beyond the resistance point and
held. Under these conditions the window
will respond to forces beyond a defined
threshold by only opening several millime-
ters.
If you again pull the switch beyond the
resistance point and hold it in position
within a period of roughly 4 seconds, this
anti-trapping mechanism will be deacti-
vated.<
When you close the windows they will
slow down as they approach the end
of their travel; this is to allow the anti-trap-
ping mechanism to respond more precisely
to any obstructions encountered in this crit-
ical range.<
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the
rear windows from being opened or closed
via the switches in the rear passenger area,
by children, for example. The same applies
to adjusting the electric rear seats, refer to
page 48 and the electric rear head
restraints, refer to page 50, as well as to
the operation of the roller sun blinds from
the rear, refer to page 113. The indicator
lamp lights up when this safety feature is
activated.
Press the safety switch when children
ride in the rear, as otherwise
unchecked closing of the windows could
lead to injuries.<
So that you can deactivate the func-
tion again, the remote control must be
ins erte d in the ig n ition l o c k or, wit h Co m fort
Access, the radio mode must be switched
on.<
After installing accessories
After installing any accessory – such as a
clamp-on antenna for a portable phone –
within the window's travel range, you will
need to have the system reinitialized for
use under the new conditions. BMW rec-
ommends having this work carried out by
your BMW center.
Glass roof, electric*
Raising, opening, closing
From radio mode on, press the switch, or
slide it in the desired direction up to the
resistance point.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the roof:
> In the radio mode for a longer time
> For approx. 1 minute in position 0 or
with the remote control disengaged.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The headliner insert slides back somewhat
when you raise the roof. When the roof is
opened the headliner retracts with it.
Do not use force to close the head-
liner insert with the roof in its raised
position, as damage to the mechanism
could result. When leaving the vehicle, dis-
engage the remote control in the ignition
lock and close the doors, as otherwise chil-
dren could operate the roof and injure
themselves etc.<
For information on using the convenience
operation at the door lock or with the
remote control, refer to page 36 or 38.
Automatic* opening and closing
Briefly press the switch beyond the resis-
tance point and then release it.
In addition, the following response is also
automatic:
With the roof open, briefly press the switch
in the 'Raise' direction: the roof rises to its
tilt-up end position.
Press the switch again in any direction to
stop the roof.
Anti-trapping mechanism
If the glass roof meets with resistance dur-
ing closing from approximately the middle
of the roof opening or when closing from
the raised position, then the closing opera-
tion is interrupted and the glass roof opens
again somewhat.
Despite the anti-trapping mechanism
inspect the roof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would
continue closing.
The protection provided by the anti-trap-
ping mechanism is limited when the switch
is pressed beyond the resistance point and
held. The roof only opens a short distance.
If you again press the switch beyond the
resistance point and hold it in position
within a period of roughly 2 seconds, the
anti-trapping mechanism will be deacti-
vated.<
When you close the glass roof, it will
slow down as it approaches the end
of its travel path; this is to allow the safety
feature to respond more precisely to any
obstructions encountered in this critical
range.<
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
Following interruptions in electrical power,
for instance, when the battery is discon-
nected, it is possible that the glass roof will
extend to its tilt-up position, but fail to
respond to other commands. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends hav-
ing this work carried out by your BMW cen-
ter.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical defect, you can
operate the glass roof manually:
1. Take out the interior lamp, reach behind
the opening, press out the cover
2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with
the onboard tool kit, refer to page 201,
in the opening provided. Turn to slide
the glass roof in the desired direction.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Adjustments
46
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed driving that is as
fatigue-free as possible. The sitting posi-
tion plays an important role together with
the safety belts and airbags in an accident.
To ensure that the safety systems operate
with optimized efficiency, we strongly urge
you to observe the instructions contained
in the following section.
For additional information on transporting
children safely, refer to page 58.
Sitting safely with airbags
Always maintain an adequate dis-
tance between yourself and the air-
bags. Always hold the steering wheel by its
rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and
3 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of
injuries to your hands and arms in the event
of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Make sure that the front passenger is cor-
rectly seated and does not rest feet or legs
on the instrument panel, otherwise leg inju-
ries can occur if the knee and front airbag
are triggered.
Never let an occupant's head rest near or
on a side airbag because the inflating air-
bag could cause a serious or fatal injury.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions,
injuries resulting from contact with airbags
cannot be fully excluded, depending on the
circumstances. The ignition and inflation
noise may provoke a mild – usually tempo-
rary – hearing loss in extremely sensitive
individuals.
For airbag locations and additional infor-
mation on airbags, refer to page 98.
Sitting safely with safety belts
Even though there is an airbag, wear a
safety belt every time you get in the vehicle.
Although airbags enhance safety by pro-
viding added protection, they are not a
substitute for safety belts.
Your vehicle has five seats that are all
equipped with a safety belt.
At all times, occupants should sit
upright and be properly restrained,
infants and small children in appropriate
child-restraint systems; larger children and
adults using the safety belts.
Expectant mothers should always wear
their safety belts, taking care to position the
lap belt against the lower hips, where it will
not exert pressure against the abdominal
area.
Never allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride in a passenger's lap.
Do not route the belt across your neck, or
run it across sharp edges. Be sure that the
belt does not become caught or jammed.
Avoid twisting the belt while routing it firmly
across the hips and shoulder. Do not allow
the belt to rest against hard or fragile
objects. Otherwise, in the event of a frontal
impact, a loose lap belt could slide over
your hips, leading to abdominal injury.
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly and pull the lap
belt periodically to readjust the tension
across your shoulder in order to avoid a
reduction in the retention effect of the
safety belt.<
For instructions on operating safety belts,
refer to page 51.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat
while operating the vehicle. The seat
could respond with unexpected movement,
and the ensuing loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.
Also on the passenger's side, do not incline
the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven, as otherwise there
is a danger in the event of an accident of
'sliding under' the safety belt, eliminating
the protection normally provided by the
belt.<
Please observe the information on damage
to safety belts provided on page 51 and the
information on the active head restraints on
page 49.
The concept
You adjust the seat in two stages:
1 Preselect the function: the button lights
up brightly
2 Adjustments: slide control knob to
> front or rear or
> upwards or downwards
> or turn
Power seat adjustment
You can use the control knob to adjust var-
ious functions after first selecting them with
the buttons.
To ensure that the safety systems
continue to provide optimized protec-
tion, please observe the adjustment
instructions on page 47.<
3 Longitudinal direction:
Height:
Backrest:
This button is normally active
4 Thigh support:
Height:
Tilt angle:
5 Lumbar support
*
, refer to next column
6 Height of the head restraint:
Front comfort seat*
adjustment
In addition to the power seat functions,
several other adjustment options are also
available with the comfort seat:
4 Thigh support:
Tilt angle:
5 Lumbar support, see below
Backrest width:
Increase or decrease lateral
support
6 Shoulder support, see below
Height of the head restraint:
Backrest:
Automatic backrest width
adjustment
The backrest automatically moves to the
widest possible position to ease driver
entry and exit before then returning to the
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Adjustments
48
standard position or stored memory set-
ting.
This automatic system is influenced on
both seats by each door as well as on the
driver's seat by the ignition and on the front
passenger's seat by the safety belt buckle.
Sports seat* adjustment
In addition to the power seat functions,
several other adjustment options are also
available with the sports seat:
4 Thigh support:
6 Height of the head restraint:
Lumbar support adjustment
5 Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contours of the
backrest to obtain additional support in the
lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive
supplementary support to help you main-
tain a relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Press front or rear:
Increase or decrease curvature
> Press top or bottom:
Extend curvature upward or downward.
Shoulder support adjustment
6 Adjust the tilt angle of the shoulder
support:
You can use the adjustable upper backrest
for supplementary support in the shoulder
region. This provides a relaxed driving
position and helps relieve stress on the
shoulder muscles.
Make corrections in the forward/
backward adjustment of the seat to
ensure that the safety belt still fits firmly
against your body. If you do not do this, the
protection provided by the safety belt may
be reduced.<
Rear comfort seat*
adjustment
You can use the control knob to adjust var-
ious functions after first selecting them with
the buttons.
1 Longitudinal direction:
Tilt angle:
Backrest:
This button is normally active
2 Lumbar support, refer to page 48
3 Shoulder support:
Height of the head restraint:
Backrest:
It is not possible to adjust the comfort
seats if the safety switch for the
power windows has been pressed, refer to
page 44.<
Adjusting passenger seat from rear
The front passenger's seat can be adjusted
from the rear sitting positions, for instance,
when a rear passenger desires more leg-
room.
Press the button to activate this function,
refer to arrow.
You can use the control knob to adjust the
settings after selecting the desired function
with the buttons.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Longitudinal direction:
Height:
Backrest:
2 Height of the head restraint:
Press the button again, refer to arrow, to
deactivate this function.
Resetting to standard adjustment
position
You can use the button to return the rear
seats to their standard or default positions.
Maintain pressure on the button until the
system completes the adjustment.
It will be necessary to return the rear
seats to their standard position before
using a child-restraint system, for instance,
refer to page 58.<
Head restraints
Adjustment information
Head restraints reduce the risk of spi-
nal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraints so that they are
centered roughly at the level of your ears.<
Height adjustment
Set the height of the head restraint.
Tilt angle adjustment
Swivel the head restraint.
With the comfort seat, adjust the dis-
tance to the back of the head via the
shoulder support.<
Side extensions adjustment
You can fold the side extensions on the
head restraint forward for increased lateral
support.
Front head restraints, active*
The front comfort seats are equipped with
an active head restraint.
When necessary, the system will respond
to a rear impact by automatically triggering
the active head restraints.
To ensure that the active head
restraints afford maximum protection,
and to avoid unnecessary risks to personal
safety, we request that you read and com-
ply with the following.
> Adjust the head restraints so that they
are centered at roughly ear height
> Do not install seat or head-restraint
covers
> Never use the head restraints as sup-
ports for suspending objects of any
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Adjustments
50
kind, such as clothes hangers. Refrain
from mounting accessories on either
the seat or the head restraint.<
Rear seats
Adjusting mechanically
> To raise: pull
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push down the head restraint.
To remove head restraints, refer to
page 50.
Center head restraint adjustment
If the head restraint has been low-
ered, pull it back up, continuing until
the detent engages, before allowing a pas-
senger to ride in the rear center position.
Otherwise the level of occupant protection
can be reduced.<
Adjusting electrically*
If necessary, adjust the head restraint's
height to ensure that it is centered at
roughly the height of the passenger's ears.
With the safety switch pressed, refer
to page 44, the height adjustment of
the head restraints is deactivated.<
The head restraints at the outer sitting posi-
tions extend automatically whenever the
system detects a passenger on the seat.
You can also adjust the height of the head
restraint electrically.
To prevent possible personal injury
and property damage, always ensure
that the area above the head restraints is
clear and unobstructed before extending
them upward.<
Manual head restraint removal and
installation
Removal
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the
stop
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove
the head restraint.
Installation
1. Press the button, arrow 1, and slide the
head restraint into its support
2. Adjust the head restraint for your per-
sonal comfort.
Rear comfort seat*
Height adjustment
If necessary, adjust the head restraint's
height to ensure that it is centered at
roughly the height of the passenger's ears.
With the safety switch pressed, refer
to page 44, the height adjustment of
the head restraints is deactivated.<
The head restraints at the outer sitting posi-
tions extend automatically whenever the
system detects a passenger on the seat.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
You can also adjust the height of the head
restraint electrically.
To prevent possible personal injury
and property damage, always ensure
that the area above the head restraints is
clear and unobstructed before extending
them upward.<
Side extensions adjustment
You can fold the side extensions on the
head restraint forward to increase lateral
support.
Safety belts
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage
in the belt buckle.
The warning lamp lights up after
driving a short distance until after
the driver and front passenger have
fastened their safety belts.
At the same time, an acoustic signal
sounds. The warning lamp also lights up
and a signal sounds if the driver or front
passenger removes the safety belt during
driving.
The warning lamp can light up and a
signal can sound if objects are laid on
the front passenger's seat.<
Releasing
1. Press the red button in the belt buckle
2. Hold the belt firmly
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be in the correct position for seat occu-
pants of every build if the seat is correctly
adjusted, refer to page 47.
The two rear safety belt buckles integrated
in the rear seat are for passengers sitting
on the left and right. The belt buckle
embossed with the word CENTER is
intended exclusively for use by passengers
riding in the center position.
Damage to safety belts
In the event of loads caused by acci-
dents or other damage: have the belt
system including the belt tensioner and any
child restraint systems replaced and the
anchorage points checked. Only have cor-
responding work carried out by a BMW
center or a workshop that uses personnel
trained in accordance with BMW require-
ments.<
Rear seats
When the rear center position is not
occupied, the latch on the safety belt
can be inserted in the slot between the
seat's upholstery and the backrest.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Adjustments
52
Heated seats*
Front
The system regulates the temperatures of
the seat cushion and backrest.
The temperature setting progresses one
step through its control sequence each
time you press the button.
To switch off:
Maintain pressure on the button for several
seconds.
Rear
The operating concept is the same as for
the front heated seats.
Temperature distribution at front
It is possible to select a temperature-distri-
bution pattern providing different levels of
heating for the seat cushion and the back-
rest, for instance, to adapt for different
clothing on the legs and upper body.
1. Select "Climate"
2. Select and confirm your selection
3. Select "Seat temp." and confirm your
selection
4. Select "Left" or "Right" and confirm
your selection
5. Turn to adjust temperature distribution
6. Press to confirm your entry.
The system automatically selects your
individual temperature distribution
settings each time you unlock the vehicle
using your personal remote control.<
Active seat ventilation*
Front
The system progresses one step through
the control sequence each time you press
the button.
To switch off:
Maintain pressure on the button for several
seconds.
Use level 3 to cool the passenger
compartment rapidly, for instance,
when heat accumulates in the vehicle. The
system automatically reverts to operation
at level 2 after a brief period.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Rear
The operating concept is the same as for
the front seat ventilation.
Active seat for driver*
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's
contours reduces muscular tension and
fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.
To activate: press the button, the indicator
lamp comes on.
Mirrors
Adjusting exterior mirrors
1 4-way adjustment
2 Selecting mirror for adjustment
To prevent the exterior mirrors on this
vehicle from being damaged, always
fold them in by hand before entering an
automatic car wash.<
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their
lenses.
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel memory on
page 55.
The mirror on the passenger's side
features a lens with a more convex
surface than the mirror installed on the
driver's side. When estimating the distance
between yourself and other traffic, bear in
mind that the objects reflected in the mirror
are closer than they appear. This means
that estimations of the distance to following
traffic should not be regarded as precise.<
Self-defrosting mirrors
The mirrors are automatically heated when-
ever the ignition is switched on.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*
These mirrors dim steplessly during for-
ward driving when struck by light. There are
two photocells located in the interior rear-
view mirror for this purpose. One is inte-
grated within the mirror's lens, refer to
arrow, while the other is located at an offset
position on the rear of the mirror housing.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photo-
cells clean and do not cover the area
between the interior rearview mirror and
the windshield. Do not attach any kind of
stickers on the windshield in front of the
mirror, either.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Adjustments
54
The mirrors automatically revert to their
clear, undimmed mode whenever you
engage transmission position R.
Illuminated vanity mirror in rear
1. Press button 1. The vanity mirror folds
down
2. Pull the mirror slightly downwards
before you swivel it
3. Press the vanity mirror back up before
folding it back in.
Steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel can be adjusted in any
of four directions by pressing the appropri-
ate end of the button.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving. There is a risk
of accident from unexpected movement.<
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to
Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory on
page 55.
Automatic steering wheel
adjustment
The steering wheel automatically moves as
high up and far forward as possible to ease
driver entry and exit before then returning
to the standard position or stored memory
setting.
This automatic feature is governed by the
driver's door and the ignition switch.
Steering wheel heater*
The steering wheel heater operates when
the ignition is on.
Press the button to activate or deactivate
this system.
The indicator lamp within the button lights
up when the steering wheel heater is in
operation.
Programming button function
You can assign specific individual
functions to the programmable but-
ton. This feature then provides you
with quick access to this function, allowing
you to control it without undue distraction
from road and traffic conditions.
1. Select "Settings"
2. Confirm
3. Select " button". Continue to press
the controller until the desired function
appears:
> "Recirc. air"
In this mode the supply of outside air
remains blocked, refer to AUC Auto-
matic recirculated-air control on
page 105
> "Navi info."
To repeat the most recent message
from the navigation system, refer to
page 141
> "AUTO P"
To activate/deactivate Automatic
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Hold refer to Automatic Hold on
page 65.
You can select the displayed function using
the button on the steering wheel.
If you have activated the Automatic
Hold feature, refer to page 65, you
can use the button on the steering wheel to
deactivate the system for parking maneu-
vers etc.<
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory
You can store and select two different
adjustment settings for the driver's seat,
exterior mirrors and steering wheel.
If your vehicle is equipped with comfort
seats, you can also store and set two sitting
positions for each additional seat with the
memory.
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Radio mode, or switch on ignition
2. Set desired sitting position; for driver's
seat also the exterior mirror and steer-
ing wheel position
3. Press
M
EMORY button:
The indicator lamp within the button
comes on
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
The indicator lamp goes out.
Selecting a stored setting
Convenience mode
1. Driver's door open after unlocking or
ignition lock in radio mode
2. Briefly press the desired memory but-
ton 1 or 2.
The system immediately cancels the
adjustment procedure when you press one
of the seat adjustment buttons or use one
of the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Driver's door closed and ignition
switched either on or off
2. Press memory button 1 or 2 and main-
tain pressure until the adjustment pro-
cess has been completed.
If you press the
M
EMORY button acciden-
tally:
Press the button again; the indicator lamp
goes out.
Do not call up a position from the
memory while the vehicle is moving.
There is a risk of accident from unexpected
movement of the seat or steering wheel.<
You can have your vehicle pro-
grammed to automatically dial in your
own individual adjustment settings for the
seat, mirrors and steering wheel whenever
you use your personal remote control to
unlock the vehicle.<
When using the Key Memory feature
always make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is empty and unob-
structed. If you fail to do so, any persons or
objects behind the seat could be injured or
damaged by a rearward movement of the
seat.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Adjustments
56
Tilt function, passenger-side mirror
Automatic curb monitor
Activating
1. Select the driver's mirror with the mirror
selector switch
2. When you select the transmission
position R, the exterior mirror glass on
the front passenger side tilts downward
slightly. This allows the driver to see the
area immediately adjacent to the vehi-
cle – such as a curb – when parking, etc.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror selection switch to the pas-
senger's side position.
Vehicle Memory,
Key Memory
How the system functions
Doubtless you have often reflected on how
great it would be if you could configure
your vehicle's various adjustment settings
to meet your own personal requirements.
In developing your vehicle, BMW has incor-
porated a number of options for personal
adjustment which you can set with the
Control Center or you can have these pro-
grammed at your BMW center.
There are vehicle-related and person-
related adjustments: Vehicle Memory and
Key Memory. You can have up to four dif-
ferent basic settings adjusted for four dif-
ferent persons. The only requirement is that
each person uses his or her own remote
control.
When your vehicle is unlocked with the
remote control, the vehicle recognizes the
individual user by means of a data
exchange with the key, and makes adjust-
ments accordingly.
To differentiate
Color-coded decals are provided to help
you distinguish the individual remote con-
trols with their different settings.
What the system can do
Please contact your BMW center for more
information on the range of options avail-
able with Vehicle Memory and Key Mem-
ory.
You will see this symbol throughout
the Owner's Manual. It is to remind
you at appropriate places of the settings
that are available to you. These positions
can be looked up in the index under the
respective keyword.<
Following configuration of the mem-
ory functions, vehicle operation may
differ from the description in the Owner's
Manual. Should you want to sell your BMW
some day, please remember to have the
memory functions reset to the default
state.<
Examples of Vehicle Memory
functions
> Central locking system: set different
signals as an acknowledgment
> Pathway lighting: deactivate/activate
function and set times
> Daytime driving lamps: activate/deacti-
vate function
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Alarm system: set different acknowl-
edgment signals to confirm arming/dis-
arming
> Alarm system: activate/deactivate inte-
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
> Automatic headlamp control: adjust
sensitivity.
Examples of Key Memory functions
> Seat memory: activate/deactivate func-
tion
> Central locking system: vehicle is
locked as soon as you drive off or if you
have not opened a door or the luggage
compartment lid after unlocking. Acti-
vate/deactivate function
> Automatic climate control: key-specific
storage of the temperature, fan and air
conditioner setting. Activate/deactivate
function
> Check Control: set languages and units
> Seat heating: recall personal tempera-
ture distribution.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
58
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Children always in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in a vehicle is in the rear
seat.
Older children should be tightly secured
with a safety belt, after they have outgrown
a booster seat that is appropriate for their
age, height and weight.
A child sitting in the rear seat and not
properly restrained may place his or
her head on or near the airbag, if so
equipped. For example, a child, even
though belted, may fall asleep with his or
her head against the side airbag. It may be
difficult for a driver to ensure that children
in the rear seat will remain properly posi-
tioned at all times and do not place their
heads on or near the side airbags. There-
fore, we recommend that the rear side air-
bags, if provided, be deactivated if you plan
to transport children in the rear seat.<
Child-restraint system in the rear
Children under 13 years of age and
children less than 5 ft/150 cm tall
should always ride in the rear and the
restraint systems should be secured with
the vehicle's safety belts.<
Younger children should be secured in an
appropriate forward-facing child-restraint
system that has first been properly
restrained. We strongly urge you to care-
fully read and comply with the instructions
for installation and use provided by the
child restraint‘s manufacturer whenever
you use such a device.
All rear sitting positions in your vehicle
meet the recommendations of SAE J1819,
an industry-recommended practice for
securing child-restraint systems in motor
vehicles.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it become necessary to use
a child-restraint system on the front
passenger seat, the airbags on the passen-
ger‘s side must be deactivated. The pas-
senger airbag indicator lamp above the
interior rearview mirror must light up con-
tinuously. Otherwise, the front passenger
airbags remain active and there is consid-
erable risk of injury to children if the airbags
are triggered, even with a child-restraint
system. In this case, children should be
seated in the rear and the system should be
checked at your BMW center.<
Never install a rearward-facing child-
restraint system in the front passen-
ger seat of this vehicle if the passenger air-
bag is not deactivated. If you do so, the
child could be severely injured when the
airbag is triggered.
Your vehicle is equipped with an airbag
supplemental restraint system for the front
passenger. Because the backrest on any
rearward-facing child-restraint system, of
the kind designed for infants under 1 year
and 20 Ibs./9 kg, would be within the air-
bag‘s deployment range, you should never
mount such a system in the front passenger
seat, since the impact of the airbag against
the child restraint‘s backrest could lead to
serious or fatal injuries.<
More information on Automatic deactiva-
tion of the front passenger airbags, refer to
page 98.
Installing child-restraint
systems
Before installing any child-restraint system
or child seat, read the following:
Observe the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions for instal-
lation and use. Otherwise the degree of
protection can be reduced.
Following an accident, have all parts of the
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
child restraint system and the affected
vehicle safety-belt system checked and,
if necessary, replaced. Only have corre-
sponding work carried out by a BMW cen-
ter or a workshop that uses personnel
trained in accordance with BMW require-
ments.<
Commercially-available child-restraint sys-
tems are designed to be secured with a lap
belt or with the lap belt portion of a combi-
nation lap/shoulder belt. Improperly or
inadequately installed restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always read and follow the instructions that
come with the system.
Child seat security
All of the rear belt retractors and the front
passenger's safety belt can be locked for
mounting and securing child-restraint sys-
tems.
Information regarding this is located near
the buckle latch of each safety belt.
To lock safety belt
Pull the entire length of the belt from the
belt retractor. Allow the reel to retract the
belt somewhat and engage the buckle,
then tighten the belt against the child-
restraint system. The retraction mechanism
is now locked.
To unlock safety belt
Release the buckle, remove the child-
restraint system and allow the belt retractor
to reel the belt completely in.
Child-restraint system with tether
strap
If you use a child-restraint system with a
tether strap, three additional tether anchor-
age points have been provided, refer to the
arrows in the illustration. Depending on the
location selected for seating in the rear
passenger area, attach the tether strap to
the corresponding anchorage point to
secure the child-restraint system, as shown
in the illustration below.
Each sitting position is fitted with a head
restraint.
Outer sitting positions:
Lift the head restraint and pass the tether
strap between the head restraint and the
seat back. It is recommended to readjust
the head restraint into the lowest possible
position.
Center sitting position:
The head restraint must be adjusted into
the lowest possible position. Pass the
tether strap over the head restraint.
Adjust the tether strap according to
the child-restraint manufacturer's
instructions.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
60
LATCH child-restraint fixing*
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for
CHildren.
The rear outer sitting positions are pro-
vided with anchors for a LATCH child-
restraint fixing.
To fit the LATCH child-restraint fixing,
follow the operating and safety
instructions of the manufacturer.<
If the vehicle is equipped with power seats
in the rear, return these to their standard
adjustment setting before using a LATCH
child-restraint fixing, refer to page 49.
Access to anchorage points
The illustration shows the left rear seat as
an example.
The anchorage points for the LATCH child-
restraint fixing are located underneath the
identifying symbols.
Installation guide
The installation guide makes it easier to fit
the LATCH child-restraint fixing and at the
same time protects the surface of the
seats.
The installation guide is available at
your BMW center. Always observe all
instructions for operation and use provided
by the manufacturer in the installation
guide.<
1. Engage the center safety belt into the
belt buckle
2. Pull the belt away from the area of the
child-restraint fixing
3. Firmly press the installation guide into
the gap between the upholstery on seat
and backrest, continuing until the two
funnel-shaped guides snap into place in
the LATCH support braces in the seat.
Pull the installation guides to remove.
On journeys
Make sure that children do not lean
out of the child's seat towards the
door panels. Otherwise severe injuries can
be caused if the side airbags are trig-
gered.<
Child-safety locks for rear doors
Slide down the safety levers on the rear
doors:
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The door can now be opened from the out-
side only.
Safety switch for power windows
and rear seats
If the vehicle is equipped with power seats
in the rear, return these to their standard
adjustment setting before using a child-
restraint system, refer to page 49.
Always press the safety switch for the
power windows, refer to page 44, when
children are in the rear of the vehicle.
This switch also disables the power rear
seat adjustment.
Incorrect or unsupervised adjustment
of the power seats in the rear could
lead to injuries or damage to the child-
restraint system.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
62
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into
the ignition lock. This also activates the
radio mode.
When the remote control is in the igni-
tion lock you can start the engine
without first switching on the ignition.<
Comfort Access*
Carry the remote control on your person
if you want to use the Comfort Access.
With Comfort Access, you do not need to
insert the remote control in the ignition
lock. You can switch the ignition on and off,
see below, or start the engine, page 63,
when a remote control is detected in the
vehicle interior.
When you switch off the engine, the
transmission moves automatically to
position P: interlock.<
Switching ignition on and off
Continue to briefly press the start/stop but-
ton to switch the radio mode on and off or
switch the ignition on and off.
Do not press the brake pedal until you
are ready to start the engine. If you
briefly press the start/stop button while the
brake pedal is pressed the engine will start
immediately.<
Radio mode
Several systems, such as the Control Cen-
ter, independent ventilation, etc., are avail-
able for use. The time and outside temper-
ature appear in the Info Display.
The radio mode is automatically
deactivated:
> After approx. 16 minutes, when a door
is closed and the system does not reg-
ister the presence of any individuals in
the vehicle
> Immediately if the remote control is
removed from the ignition lock
> With Comfort Access, by pressing the
door handle.<
Ignition switched on
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Ignition off
The indicator lamps in the Info Display go
out. Only the automatic transmission's
range display remains visible for a brief
period.
Removing remote control from
ignition lock
Press the remote control in briefly; it is
ejected and now protrudes slightly from the
lock. This procedure will also switch off the
ignition if it is on.
Switch off the engine before removing
the remote control from the ignition
lock.
The transmission automatically shifts to
position P: interlock.<
If the remote control is still in the ignition
lock when the driver's door is opened, a
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
gong will sound and a message will appear
in the Info Display.
Starting engine
Do not run the engine in closed
rooms, as otherwise the inhaling of
toxic exhaust gases can cause uncon-
sciousness and death. The exhaust gases
contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and
colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always
select position P on the selector lever and
engage the parking brake before leaving
the vehicle with the engine running.<
When starting the engine, do not press the
accelerator pedal.
Do not allow the engine to warm up by
leaving it running while the vehicle remains
stationary. Instead, begin to drive immedi-
ately at a moderate engine speed.
Your BMW is equipped with the conve-
nience starting feature. After pressing the
brake pedal, all you need to do is briefly
press the start/stop button. The system
responds by automatically engaging the
starter and allowing it to run until the engine
starts, after which it then disengages auto-
matically.
If the engine fails to start on the first
attempt, for instance, if it is very hot or cold:
Press the accelerator pedal halfway down
while engaging the starter.
During a cold start at very low tempera-
tures, below +57/–156, at high altitudes
over 3,281 ft/1,000 m:
> Engage the starter for approx.
10 seconds the first time
> Press the accelerator pedal halfway
down while engaging the starter.
Refrain from starting the vehicle
repeatedly at brief intervals, and avoid
an excessive number of starting attempts if
the vehicle fails to start; repeated activation
of the starter over an extended period
would allow unburned or only partially
combusted fuel to enter the catalytic con-
verter, where it can cause overheating and
damage to the unit.<
If you have accidentally switched off
the engine while driving, it can be
restarted from a speed of approx. 3 mph/
5 km/h by pressing the button. It is not nec-
essary to press the brake pedal.<
Switching off engine
With the vehicle stationary, briefly press the
start/stop button. This also activates the
radio mode.
The transmission automatically shifts to
position P: interlock.
Transmission position N remains
engaged if you keep to the following
order:
1. With Comfort Access: insert the remote
control into the ignition lock
2. With the engine running, engage trans-
mission position N
3. Switch off the engine
4. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
This function is useful in automatic car
washes, etc.
Position P is engaged automatically after
approx. 30 minutes or when you remove
the remote control from the ignition lock.
Remember to observe the Check Control
for status messages.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
64
Should exceptional circumstances
render it necessary for you to switch
off the engine while the vehicle is moving,
press the start/stop button for approxi-
mately 1 second.
If you maintain pressure on the start/stop
button for longer than two seconds while
switching off the ignition, the remote con-
trol will be ejected.<
Before leaving the vehicle, remove
the remote control from the ignition
lock; with Comfort Access, always take the
remote control with you.<
Parking brake
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with an electrome-
chanical parking brake.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while
parked.
You can operate or use the parking brake in
two different ways:
> Manually, by briefly pressing the button
> Automatically, through activation of the
Automatic Hold mode, refer to page 65.
An electrohydraulic mechanism then
engages the parking brake to prevent the
rear wheels from turning whenever you
switch off the engine.
When the engine is running, parking brake
engagement is controlled by the brake sys-
tem's hydraulic circuits, which act on the
disc brakes at the front and rear wheels.
Brake pedal feel
Because this function is activated using
the brake system's hydraulic circuits, the
response of the brake pedal may change
slightly. Engagement may also be accom-
panied by activation noise – this is normal.
Manual engagement
Briefly press the button, the
word PARK appears briefly in
the Info Display. With the park-
ing brake engaged, the indica-
tor lamp lights up red in
the Info Display, refer to page 12.
With the ignition off, the indicator
lamp goes out after a brief
period.<
Manual release
With the ignition on, briefly
press the button: the indicator
lamp in the Info Display goes
out.
Provided that the remote control is
inserted in the ignition lock, you can
also release the parking brake after the
engine has been switched off. This function
is intended for use in automatic car
washes, etc.<
When leaving the vehicle, always
release the remote control from the
detent in the ignition lock; this precaution
prevents children from disengaging the
parking brake, etc.
The parking brake can still be engaged at
any time when the remote control is
released from the detent. It is only possible
to disengage the parking brake with the
ignition on.<
If exceptional circumstances should
make it necessary to engage the
parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain pressure on the button.
The indicator lamp appears in red in the
Info Display. A gong sounds at the same
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
time.
The brake lamps come on.
The vehicle continues to brake automati-
cally for as long as you maintain pressure
on the button.<
When you brake the vehicle to a vir-
tual stop, i.e., down to a speed of
approximately 2 mph/3 km/h or below, the
parking brake remains engaged.
The indicator lamp in the Info Display
lights up red. Briefly press the button to
disengage the parking brake manually.<
Automatic Hold
You can activate this feature after starting
the engine; it then remains operational until
the next time the engine is switched off.
This feature provides supplementary sup-
port during vehicle operation by automati-
cally engaging and releasing the parking
brake during stops at traffic lights, in stop-
and-go traffic, etc. As the vehicle then no
longer tends to creep when the transmis-
sion is engaged, it is no longer necessary to
hold the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal.
It prevents the vehicle from rolling back-
ward during uphill starts.
The parking brake engages automatically
when you stop the vehicle and switch off
the engine.
You can activate or cancel the Automatic
Hold feature by selecting the "Settings"
menu in the Control Center. A description
of the Control Center is provided on
page 17.
Automatic Hold activation/
deactivation
1. Select "Settings"
2. Select and confirm
3. Select "AUTO P". Press the controller
to activate/deactivate the desired func-
tion
> Automatic Hold is activated.
The green AUTO P status message in
the Info Display shows you that the sys-
tem is ready for operation
> Automatic Hold is deactivated.
The green AUTO P status message dis-
appears from the Info Display.
You can assign the Automatic Hold
function to the programmable button
on the steering wheel, refer to page 54.
This feature then provides you with quick
access to the Automatic Hold function,
allowing you to control it without undue dis-
traction from road and traffic conditions.<
You can also deactivate Auto-
matic Hold by pressing the but-
ton while the vehicle is station-
ary. The vehicle remains
stationary, the indicator lamp
changes from green to red. Press the but-
ton again to release the parking brake.
Driving with Automatic Hold
The parking brake engages automatically
when the vehicle comes to a stop. The indi-
cator lamp in the Info Display lights
up green.
To start off again, simply press the acceler-
ator pedal. The parking brake is released
automatically; the indicator lamp
goes out.
Do not drive through an automatic car
wash with the Automatic Hold on and
the engine running. The system would
engage the parking brake while the vehicle
is stationary.<
Parking with Automatic Hold
The parking brake engages automatically
when you stop the vehicle and switch off
the engine. The indicator lamp
changes from green to red.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
66
Provided that the remote control is
inserted in the ignition lock, you can
also release the parking brake manually
after the engine has been switched off,
refer to page 64. This function is useful in
automatic car washes, etc.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.<
When leaving the vehicle, always
release the remote control from the
detent in the ignition lock; this precaution
prevents children from disengaging the
parking brake, etc.<
For your safety
Automatic Hold is automatically deacti-
vated when
> the engine is switched off
> the system detects that the driver's seat
is not occupied while the engine is run-
ning
> the hood is opened while the engine is
running
> the luggage compartment is opened
with the transmission in position R while
the engine is running, and
> when the parking brake is used to bring
the vehicle to a stop.
The indicator lamp changes from
green to red, and the AUTO P letters in the
Info Display disappear.
Before starting off again, briefly press the
button to disengage the parking brake
manually, refer to page 64, or reactivate
Automatic Hold, refer to page 65.
Before leaving the vehicle with the
engine running, always move the
automatic transmission's selector lever to
position P and ensure that the parking
brake is engaged. The vehicle could start to
roll if you fail to observe these precautions.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.<
Automatic Hold is automatically deac-
tivated whenever the system detects
any tendency for the wheels to spin in
response to slippery road surfaces. Note
the status reports in the Check Control.
You can find additional information on the
Check Control on page 83.<
Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs, the indicator
lamp lights up yellow in the Info Dis-
play and a status report will appear in the
Check Control. Please note any supple-
mentary information that appears on the
Control Display.
Releasing parking brake manually
You can respond to any interruptions in the
supply of electrical power, for instance, if
the battery is discharged or disconnected,
by releasing the parking brake manually.
Before proceeding to release the
parking brake manually, and each
time you park the vehicle without engaging
the parking brake, always ensure that the
automatic transmission's selector lever is in
position P, refer to page 68. Note the range
indicated in the Info Display.
If the wheel must be changed on a surface
with a more severe slope, take additional
precautions to secure the vehicle from roll-
ing e.g. with a chock, refer to page 204
Otherwise there is a danger that the vehicle
could start to roll if parked on a steep
slope.<
Should it also be necessary to release the
automatic transmission's lockout manually,
for instance, if the battery is discharged,
always adhere to the following sequence:
1. If necessary, start by manually releasing
the parking brake
2. Then release the automatic transmis-
sion's lockout manually, refer to
page 70.
Jump-starting and towing, refer to
pages 209 and 210.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
What you will need
1 Screwdriver handle
2 Emergency-release tool
3 10 mm open-end wrench
You will find the required tools in the
onboard tool kit mounted on the inside of
the luggage compartment lid, refer to
page 201.
Insert the emergency-release tool in the
screwdriver handle as shown in the illustra-
tion.
Releasing
1. Remove the floor mat and the cover on
the spare tire
2. Guide the emergency-release tool with
the screwdriver handle into the open-
ing, arrow 1
3. Apply the open-end wrench to the
hexagon on the emergency-release
tool.
Press against the resistance from the
spring to guide the emergency-release
tool all the way in, then hold it in place.
Turn the emergency-release tool in the
direction indicated by arrow 2, continu-
ing until you hear the mechanism snap
into place and feel resistance; maintain
pressure on the tool after the mecha-
nism engages
4. Use the open-end wrench to turn the
emergency-release tool against the
drive unit's mechanical resistance, con-
tinuing to rotate it in arrow direction 2
until you feel a substantial increase in
turning effort
To prevent possible damage to the
rear brakes, always make sure that
the parking brake is completely released
before driving the vehicle.<
5. Return the tools to their places
6. Return the spare tire cover and the floor
mat to their original locations.
Have any defects repaired at the
nearest BMW center. The technicians
can also return the parking brake to normal
operational status after it has been
released manually in response to malfunc-
tion.<
Following manual release, the actual
status of the parking brake may vary
from that displayed by the indicator lamp.<
Operation after interruptions in
power supply
The parking brake may only be used
again, if it was released manually after
an interruption in power supply, i.e. as a
result of a discharged or disconnected bat-
tery. If this is not done, the parking brake
may fail to operate correctly. Even with the
parking brake engaged, there would be a
danger of the vehicle rolling on steep
hills.<
Once the electrical power supply has been
restored you can again use the parking
brake:
With the ignition on and the
vehicle stationary, briefly press
the button three times at inter-
vals of approx. 5 seconds. This
initializes the system as follows:
> Initializing the disengaged setting
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
68
> Engaging: the system registers the new
status and the brake setting is initial-
ized. The indicator lamp in the
Info Display lights up red.
> Releasing: the parking brake is ready
for operation. The indicator lamp
in the Info Display goes out.
Automatic transmission
with Steptronic
In addition to fully automatic operation, you
can also manually shift with the button on
the steering wheel, refer to page 70.
Transmission range selection
P R N D
The selector lever position is indicated, and
in the manual mode the gear currently
engaged.
Program display
S or M1 – M6
Buttons on steering wheel
Press briefly to proceed through a selection
sequence consisting of the automatic pro-
gram, the Sport program, and the manual
mode.
Steptronic:
Upshifting and downshifting, refer to Sport
program and manual operation.
Selecting transmission range
The selector lever is at the center
position. To select transmission
ranges D, R or N, always start by pulling
toward the steering wheel, arrow 1, then
press up or down. Note the range indicated
in the Info Display.<
> Range D or R:
Press the selector lever up or down,
continuing to apply pressure to move it
beyond the resistance point
> Neutral N:
Press the selector lever up to the resis-
tance point
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Park P:
Press button P, arrow 2.
The selector lever immediately returns to
the center position when released.
With the vehicle stationary, press the
brake pedal before shifting out of P
or N; the shift command will not be exe-
cuted unless the brake is applied: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a range, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
You can activate the Automatic Hold fea-
ture to suppress the vehicle's tendency to
creep, refer to page 65.<
Shift commands are transmitted electroni-
cally. To help avoid malfunctions, each
command undergoes a plausibility check
prior to execution.
Remember to observe the Check Control
for status messages.
You can find additional information on the
Check Control on page 83.
To prevent the vehicle from rolling,
always select position P and engage
the parking brake before leaving the vehicle
with the engine running. Note the informa-
tion provided in the Info Display.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.<
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
The transmission lockout prevents the rear
wheels from turning. The lockout disen-
gages when you press the selector lever
toward D, N or R while the engine is run-
ning.
P is engaged automatically as soon as
you switch off the engine unless N is
engaged and the remote control is inserted
in the ignition lock, refer to page 63.<
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
Select only if your journey is interrupted for
a long period.
> From D press the selector lever up
> From R press the selector lever down.
Note the arrows indicating direction in the
range display.
N remains engaged whenever the
remote control remains in the ignition
lock after the ignition is switched off. This
function is useful in automatic car washes,
etc.
After approx. 30 minutes the system auto-
matically engages P. Remember to observe
the Check Control for status messages.
Switching off engine refer to page 63.<
D Drive, automatic driving position
This is the range recommended for normal
vehicle operation. All forward gears are
available.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in
position D.
Kick-down
The kick-down mode provides maximum
acceleration.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the
full-throttle resistance point.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
70
Sport program and manual operation
Press the S/M/D button on the steering
wheel:
The sport program is activated, and S
appears in the program indicator of the Info
Display. This program is recommended for
a performance-oriented driving style.
Pressing the S/M/D button again switches
into the manual mode.
When the buttons on the back of the steer-
ing wheel are touched, the transmission
upshifts. When the buttons on the front of
the steering wheel are touched, the trans-
mission downshifts. The Info Display shows
the manual ranges M1 through M6.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combi-
nation of engine and vehicle speed; thus,
for example, a downshift that would cause
the engine to overrev will not be executed
by the system. The selected gear appears
briefly in the Info Display, followed by the
current gear.
Pressing the S/M/D button again switches
into the Automatic program again, and D
appears in the program indicator of the Info
Display.
Malfunction
A message appears in the Check Control
and in the Control Display. The directional
arrows also start to flash in the Info Display.
A malfunction has occurred in the transmis-
sion system. Avoid heavy loads.
While it will remain still possible to move
the selector lever to any desired position,
the transmission will revert to operation in
its default mode with only a limited number
of forward gears.
Have the system checked as soon as pos-
sible.
Jump-starting and towing, refer to
pages 209 and 210.
Manual release of transmission
lockout
You can respond to any interruptions in the
supply of electrical power, for instance, if
the battery is discharged or disconnected,
by releasing the transmission lockout man-
ually.
To prevent the drive wheels from
locking up and sliding, the transmis-
sion lockout must always be released man-
ually before the vehicle is towed.<
Press the brake pedal before releas-
ing the transmission lockout manu-
ally. If the brakes are not applied, the vehi-
cle could start to roll if parked on a steep
slope.
The transmission lockout should only be
released for towing. Remember to engage
the transmission lockout when you repark
the vehicle after moving it.
Should it also be necessary to release the
parking brake manually, owing to a dis-
charged battery, etc., always adhere to the
following sequence:
1. Start by manually releasing the parking
brake, refer to page 66
2. Then proceed to manually release the
transmission lockout.<
Jump-starting and towing, refer to
pages 209 and 210.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Releasing
1. Use the vehicle key to release the cover
panel beneath the instrument panel by
turning the lock counterclockwise, then
fold down the cover
2. Pull out the release lever with the loop 1
until it locks into place: the transmission
lockout is unlocked.
Re-engage the transmission lockout
after parking the vehicle at its destina-
tion. Otherwise there is a danger that the
vehicle could start to roll if parked on a
steep slope.<
Locking again
1. Disengage the release lever by pressing
it together with the red detent lever,
arrow
2. Guide the release lever all the way back
into its original position – the transmis-
sion lockout is again engaged
3. Fold up and lock the cover panel again.
Now – and not before – the key may be
removed.
Once the transmission lockout has
been re-engaged, the warning in the
Check Control should disappear, and the
symbol in the Info Display should change
from N to P. Should this fail to happen,
there is a danger that the vehicle could start
to roll.<
Information on jump-starting and towing
begins on page 209.
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Move the lever beyond the resistance
point. It then returns to the center position
when released. Press the lever up to the
resistance point to switch off the turn sig-
nals.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever up to but not beyond the
resistance point. It then returns to the cen-
ter position when released.
If the flashing of the indicator lamp and the
ticking from the relay are both faster than
usual, this indicates that one of the bulbs is
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
72
defective; if a trailer is attached, this could
also indicate that one of its turn signal
bulbs is defective.
Wiper system
1 Standard wiper speed: briefly press
once.
Fast wipe: briefly press twice
2 To switch off wipers or for brief wipe
3 To activate/deactivate rain sensor
4 To clean windshield and headlamps
5 To adjust rain sensor sensitivity level
The lever automatically returns to its
initial position when released.<
1 Standard wiper speed
The system automatically reverts to opera-
tion in the intermittent mode whenever the
vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
You can also select this position by press-
ing the lever upward beyond the resistance
point.
The system automatically reverts to opera-
tion in the standard wipe mode whenever
the vehicle is stationary.
4 Cleaning windshield
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a
brief period.
Headlamp washers
Each fifth time you press into position 4 to
clean the windshield while the headlamps
are on.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could
be obscured. To avoid freezing, use a
washer fluid antifreeze, refer to page 73.
Avoid activating the washer when the res-
ervoir is empty, as damage to the pump
could result.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles and the
windshield itself in the area around the wip-
ers are heated automatically when the igni-
tion is switched on.
Rain sensor
The rain sensor is located on the wind-
shield, directly in front of the interior rear-
view mirror.
Activating rain sensor
Briefly press the button as of ignition in
radio mode. The indicator lamp comes on.
The wipers will always respond by com-
pleting at least one sweep of the wind-
shield.
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Turn the serrated dial 5.
Deactivating rain sensor
Briefly press the button again. The indicator
lamp goes out.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The rain sensor is automatically deac-
tivated when you switch off the igni-
tion.<
Deactivate the rain sensor when
passing through an automatic car
wash. Failure to do so could result in dam-
age caused by undesired wiper activa-
tion.<
Selecting wiper fold-out position
Important for changing wiper blades, when
folding away from windshield to prevent
blades from sticking when ice forms, etc.
1. Switch off the engine and remove the
remote control from the ignition lock
2. Press the wiper lever up and maintain
pressure for about 3 seconds until the
wipers are roughly vertical: this is the
fold-out position.
After folding the wipers back against the
windshield you will need to reactivate the
wiper system:
1. Insert the remote control to activate the
radio mode in the ignition lock
2. Apply brief upward pressure to the
wiper lever. The wipers return to their
retracted position and are ready for nor-
mal operation.
To prevent damage to the wipers,
always fold them back against the
windshield before switching on either the
radio mode or the ignition.<
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Always keep it well away from sparks
and open flames, and store it in tightly
closed containers well out of the reach of
children. Always observe the instructions
for use provided on the containers.<
We recommend that you mix the
washer fluid before adding it to the
reservoir.<
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Capacity: 6.3USquarts/6liters.
Fill with water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to manufac-
turer's recommendations.
Programmable cruise
control
The concept
The programmable cruise control is avail-
able for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph/
30 km/h and higher. The vehicle maintains
and stores the speed that you set using the
lever mounted on the steering column.
You can also use the multilevel preset
mode to store 6 desired speeds for later
selection with the same lever, refer to
page 74.
This feature assists you in quickly adapting
the vehicle speed to specific road condi-
tions, e.g. changes in speeds limits.
Do not use the programmable cruise
control when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road con-
ditions, e.g. snow, rain, ice, loose road sur-
face, that do not permit a constant speed.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
74
One lever for all functions
1 Maintaining and storing speed,
accelerating
Press the lever up to the resistance point:
The system maintains and stores the cur-
rent vehicle speed. Every time you briefly
press the lever, the vehicle's speed
increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press the lever longer:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure
on the accelerator pedal. The system main-
tains and stores your current speed as
soon as you release the lever.
The vehicle may accelerate beyond
the preset speed on steep downhill
stretches where the engine's braking effect
alone may not be sufficient to slow the
vehicle. Speed can drop on uphill grades if
the engine output is insufficient.<
2 Maintaining and storing speed,
decelerating
Pull lever:
Functions similar to 1, only the vehicle
speed is decreased.
3 Interrupting cruise control
With the cruise control active, briefly press
the lever up or down.
In addition, cruise control is interrupted
automatically
> when you apply pressure to the brake
pedal
> when you select neutral position of the
automatic transmission
> when the DSC control is operative.
4 Recalling stored speed
Briefly press button 4:
The vehicle accelerates to and maintains
the last speed stored.
Deactivating system
When the ignition is switched off, the sys-
tem is deactivated and the stored speed is
deleted.
Displays in Info Display
5 Display of speed ready for recall.
> cruise control activated
> cruise control deactivated
6 Display of stored desired speed in the
multilevel function
5 and 6 are displayed when the sys-
tem is activated.<
Storing desired speeds
With vehicle stationary
Switch on the ignition.
Press 1 or pull 2 the lever beyond the resis-
tance point: the selectable speed level is
displayed with 5.
> To increase desired speed:
Press the lever forward
> To decrease desired speed:
Pull back the lever
> To store desired speed:
Press button 4 for approx. 3 seconds.
The stored desired speed appears in 6.
If 6 speeds have already been stored,
it will be necessary to delete one
before entering a new preset speed.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
While driving
Press 1 or pull 2 the lever beyond the resis-
tance point:
Press button 4 for approx. 3 seconds. The
respective driven speed is applied as the
desired speed and displayed with 6.
If all of the graduations flash twice,
this indicates that 6 desired speeds
have already been stored. You must then
delete at least one.<
Deleting desired speeds
Select the desired speed 5.
Press button 4 for approx. 3 seconds.
Activating multilevel preset mode
Press 1 or pull 2 the lever beyond the resis-
tance point.
The current driving speed is maintained,
stored and displayed as the available
speed 5.
If no desired speeds are stored, you
can increase or reduce the speed by
5 mph/10 km/h with the multilevel preset
mode activated each time you press or pull
the lever beyond the resistance point.<
Selecting desired speed
Press 1 or pull 2 the lever beyond the resis-
tance point.
The next desired speed is selected.
The available speed changes to the
minimum speed of approx. 20 mph/
30 km/h when you pull the lever beyond the
resistance point 2 at the lowest desired
speed.<
Interrupting the cruise control
With the cruise control active, briefly press
the lever up or down 3.
Hiding display for multilevel preset
function
When activated, press the lever up or
down 3 for approx. 3 seconds.
Showing display for multilevel preset
function again
Press 1 or pull 2 the lever beyond the resis-
tance point.
Deactivating multilevel preset mode
The multilevel preset function is also deac-
tivated when you switch off the ignition.
Active cruise control*
The concept
With active cruise control you can select a
desired speed which is not only automati-
cally maintained when driving on open
roadways, but also varied to maintain a
selected distance setting as slower traffic is
encountered.
Active cruise control is a technological
advance over the familiar cruise control and
is a welcome relief from the constant
adjustment of speed that can accompany
driving in traffic on freeways or other high-
speed thoroughfares. Especially on longer
trips, the system can reduce fatigue and
tension, while increasing your enjoyment of
driving. Please use it safely and responsi-
bly.
In addition to holding a steady cruising
speed, if you do encounter slower vehicles
ahead, active cruise control will, within the
scope of given possibilities, adjust your
vehicle’s speed automatically so that you
can flow with the traffic without frequent
intervention by the driver. If, for example,
while cruising at the selected speed, you
begin to approach a slower vehicle ahead
of you in the same lane, the system will
reduce your vehicle's speed to the same as
that of the vehicle ahead to maintain your
selected distance setting between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead. There are
four settings for distance, which is addi-
tionally speed-dependent. Based on your
selected distance setting, the system auto-
matically decreases the throttle setting and
lightly applies the brakes if necessary.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
76
The vehicle brake lamps will automatically
illuminate to signal a following driver to take
action. In addition, it may be necessary for
the vehicle to downshift to maintain the dis-
tance setting selected. If the vehicle ahead
speeds up or when the lane ahead
becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate
to the speed you have selected by increas-
ing the throttle setting and shifting gears as
needed.
Active cruise control is not and must
not be used as a collision avoidance/
warning system.<
Since this active cruise control sys-
tem is a new technology and operates
differently from conventional cruise control
systems which you may be accustomed,
you are strongly urged to read all of the
pages relating to this system before use.
Pay special attention to the information
contained in the Things to know about
active cruise control section in this manual
beginning on page 78.<
Info Display screen contents
1 Stored desired speed display
2 Detected vehicle display. Lights up
when vehicle driving ahead is detected
3 Selected distance to vehicle driving
ahead
4 Digital speed display.
Appears briefly when you select your
desired speed, refer to page 77
The system is activated.
The display appears as soon as
you activate the system and no
vehicle is detected driving
ahead.
Vehicle detected.
The display lights up when a
vehicle is detected driving
ahead.
The system requests you to
intervene by braking or with an
evasive maneuver. The display
flashes and a chime sounds.
The active cruise control cannot
automatically restore the distance to the
vehicle driving ahead. You will find more
detailed information on page 80.
Automatic intervention by ABS
or DSC, or you actuate the
parking brake while driving. The
active cruise control now only
intervenes by braking.
Operating active cruise control
1 Activate system,
store and increase desired speed
2 Activate system,
store and decrease desired speed
3 Deactivate system
4 With system deactivated:
Briefly press the button to recall the
stored speed and distance
4 With system activated:
Increase desired speed by 1 mph/
1 km/h with each press of the button
5 Select distance to vehicle driving
ahead. You can choose from four avail-
able distance settings. You will find
more detailed information on page 78
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjust your desired speed to the traf-
fic conditions and remain ready to
brake at all times. Great differences in
speed to the vehicles driving ahead, e.g.
when quickly approaching a truck or when
another vehicle swerves into your lane,
cannot be compensated for by the sys-
tem.<
Activate system
From approx. 20 mph/30 km/h you can
activate the system by pressing the lever
forward or pulling it back:
The current driving speed is stored as a
desired speed and briefly displayed in the
speedometer, refer to arrow.
If the display ACC --- mph/km/h
appears briefly in the speedometer,
it might be that conditions necessary for
operation are not currently being met.
To call up Check Control messages, refer
to page 84.<
1 Desired speed store and increase
Press the lever forward:
The system applies and stores your current
speed as a desired speed. The speedome-
ter indicates this speed.
Subsequently pressing forward increases
the desired speed to the next 5-mile place/
10 km/h.
Each time the lever is pressed forward
again, the desired speed is increased by
another 5 mph/10 km/h until a maximum of
110 mph/180 km/h is reached. The speed
then displayed is stored and reached on a
clear road.
2 Desired speed store and decrease
Pull back the lever:
The current driving speed is rounded off to
the next 5-mile place/10 km/h, displayed
and stored.
Each time the lever is pulled back again,
the desired speed is decreased by another
5 mph/10 km/h until the minimum speed of
20 mph/30 km/h is reached. The speed
then displayed is stored and reached on a
clear road.
3 Deactivate system
Press the lever up or down while the sys-
tem is active. The displays in the speedom-
eter disappear. You can use the system
again as required.
In addition, the system is deactivated auto-
matically:
> When you apply pressure to the brake
pedal
> When you select the automatic trans-
mission's neutral range N
> When you deactivate the DSC Dynamic
Stability Control
> When you actuate the parking brake
during driving
> When the system reduces the speed to
below 20 mph/30 km/h due to a traffic
situation.
The system deactivates automatically
when the speed is set to below
20 mph/30 km/h. A gong sounds and a
message appears in the Check Control.
The active intervention of the driver is
required, otherwise there is an accident
danger.<
Background lighting
You can switch off the background lighting
of the speedometer and tachometer
> when you have deactivated the system
> when the prewarning field in the
tachometer has gone out, refer to
page 81
> when the destination guidance system
of the navigation system is deactivated.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
78
Press the lever up or down for approx.
1second.
4 Resume to stored desired speed
and distance setting
Press button 4:
The displays appear in the speedometer.
The system is reactivated and uses the last
stored desired speed and distance setting.
4 Fine adjustment of desired speed
In the activated state, the desired speed
increases by 1 mph/1 km/h each time
button 4 is pressed briefly.
5Select distance
You can choose from four distance steps.
> Rotary switch upward:
Increase distance
> Rotary switch downward:
Decrease distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the
speedometer.
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This distance is always set
when the system is used for the
first time after starting the
engine.
Use good judgment to select the
appropriate following distance given
road conditions, traffic, applicable laws and
driving recommendations for safe following
distance.<
Things to know about active cruise control
As with conventional cruise control
systems, active cruise control in no
way diminishes or substitutes for the
driver's own personal responsibility, alert-
ness and awareness in adjusting speed,
braking or otherwise controlling the vehi-
cle. The driver should decide when to use
the system on the basis of road, traffic, vis-
ibility, and weather conditions. Active
cruise control is intended for use on high-
way-type roadways where traffic is moving
relatively smoothly. Do not use this system
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
in city driving; heavy traffic such as during
rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slip-
pery roads or roads with sharp curves such
as highway off-ramps; during inclement
weather such as snow, strong rain or fog;
or when entering interchanges, service/
parking areas or toll booths. It is also
important to regulate your vehicle's speed
and distance setting within applicable legal
limits. Always be ready to take action or
apply the brakes if necessary, especially
when the system is actively following a
vehicle in front of you.<
Always remember that the range and
ability of the system does have physi-
cal limitations. It will not apply the brakes or
decelerate your vehicle when there is a
slow-moving vehicle, stopped vehicle or
stationary object ahead of you, as for
example, at a traffic light or a parked vehi-
cle. Also, the system does not react to
oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other type
of potential traffic such as a rider on horse-
back. It is also possible that the system
may not detect smaller moving objects
such as motorcycles or bicycles. Be espe-
cially alert when encountering any of these
situations as the system will neither auto-
matically brake, nor provide a warning to
you. Also, be aware that every decrease in
the distance setting allows your vehicle to
come closer to a vehicle in front of you and
requires a heightened amount of alert-
ness.<
If while your vehicle is actively following a
vehicle in front of you and the vehicle
ahead speeds up or the lane ahead
becomes clear, then your vehicle will
accelerate to the speed you have selected.
Be aware that changing to a clear, unob-
structed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system
when you pull into an exit lane for a
highway off-ramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered man-
ner on a highway may cause a delay in the
system's reaction to a vehicle in front of you
or may cause the system to react to a vehi-
cle actually in the lane next to you. Always
be ready to take action or apply the brakes
if necessary.
Active cruise control can only decelerate
the vehicle to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. If
the system reduces vehicle speed below
20 mph/30 km/h or if DSC/ABS is engaged
while driving, the system will automatically
deactivate.
Remember, the system cannot stop
your vehicle. In addition, the system is
deactivated whenever the driver applies
the vehicle brakes, shifts the transmission
from drive/D to neutral/N, or deactivates
DSC. After any deactivation, the system will
no longer automatically activate the vehicle
brakes, which means the driver must inter-
vene and resume manual braking. You
should then reactivate the system only
when you are fully aware of the prior speed
and distance settings.<
Active cruise control may brake when you
reduce the stored desired speed; however,
the driver must constantly monitor traffic
and intervene if necessary.
When you switch off the engine or ignition,
active cruise control is fully switched off,
too, and any settings you have selected are
canceled.
Behavior in curves
Because of the limited range of the system,
it is possible that in curves or on the peaks
and valleys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead
may be recognized late, or not at all. There-
fore, it is up to the driver to select a speed
that is prudent in view of the curves and
terrain of the roadway.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving
80
In approaching a curve, it is possible that
active cruise control would react briefly to
a vehicle in the adjacent lane. In addition,
the system can sense if your vehicle is in
a curve and may not accelerate. If your
vehicle decelerates in either case, you can
choose to overcome the deceleration by
briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Driver interventions
Remember actions by the driver
always supersede and take priority
over the system's automatic actions. Any-
time the driver presses down on the accel-
erator pedal, any automatic braking action
by the system is interrupted until the pedal
is fully released. After doing this, release
the accelerator and the system again con-
trols your cruising speed and distance set-
ting. While driving with activated system,
resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
will cause the system not to brake even if
necessary. Be certain that floormats or
other objects on the vehicle floor do not
interfere with movement of the accelerator
pedal.<
While active cruise control is capable
of braking your vehicle automatically
when you approach a slower vehicle
ahead, it is important to be aware that the
ability of the system to apply the brakes is
also limited, if you are driving down a steep
grade or when you reduce your desired
speed sharply. The system cannot stop
your vehicle. It uses only a portion of brak-
ing system capacity and does not utilize the
full capacity of the vehicle braking system.
Therefore, the system cannot decrease
your speed for large differences in speed
between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Examples: during emergency brak-
ing, when you approach a vehicle traveling
at a much lower speed than your own
speed such as approaching a toll booth or
when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of
you at close range.<
Whenever active cruise control
recognizes a situation that
requires driver braking because
the system capacity has been
reached or has been exceeded,
the system alerts the driver by flashing this
symbol in the instrument cluster and
sounding a chime.
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle moves from an adjacent
lane into your lane, active cruise control will
not recognize this vehicle until it is fully in
your lane ahead of your vehicle.
Malfunctions
The build-up of foreign material, e.g.,
snow, ice, dirt, road debris, etc., can lead
to reduced detection performance of active
cruise control. You should check the sen-
sor under the front bumper and clean it as
necessary prior to driving your vehicle.
If the sensor becomes covered by foreign
material or has a malfunction, it is possible
that the sensor will no longer be able to
detect vehicles in front of you. After the
system recognizes that the sensor is no
longer functional, a message is displayed in
the Check Control and an acoustic signal is
emitted, refer to page 83. Also observe the
additional information provided in the Con-
trol Center.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Everything under control
Odometer, outside temperature display, clock
When the ignition is off you can briefly acti-
vate the time, outside temperature and
odometer displays by pressing the knob at
the upper left of the Info Display.
1 Outside temperature display, clock
The outside temperature and the time dis-
plays are active starting at the radio mode
in the ignition lock.
You can change the units of measure,
7/6, in the "Settings" menu, refer to
page 89.
Setting the clock, refer to page 90.
Ice warning
A warning signal sounds when the outside
temperature falls to roughly +37.57/+36,
this is accompanied by a message in the
Check Control.
Please bear in mind that the ice warn-
ing does nothing to alter the fact that
glare ice may be present on roads at tem-
peratures higher than +37.57/+36, for
instance, on bridges and shaded sur-
faces.<
2 Odometer
The odometer panel also provides displays
for the computer and the Check Control.
Regardless of the current display mode,
you can view the odometer reading for a
short period by pressing the knob at the
upper left of the Info Display.
Check Control, refer to page 83.
Computer, refer to page 85.
3 Trip odometer
The trip odometer must be present in the
display before you can reset it to zero.
Reset by pressing the knob at the upper left
of the Info Display.
Tachometer
The orange warning sector gradually
moves upward as the engine warms to its
normal operating temperature. The seg-
ments disappear in sequence as the engine
warms to its normal operating temperature.
Avoid allowing the engine speed to rise as
far as the orange warning sector whenever
possible.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything under control
82
Service requirement display
Info Display screen contents
The distance/period remaining until your
next service briefly appears when you
switch on the ignition.
The Info Display immediately
switches to its computer mode when
you press one of the two buttons in the turn
signal lever, refer to page 85.<
Control Display
You can view additional information on ser-
vice and maintenance procedures by
selecting the "Car data" menu.
1. Select and confirm your
selection
2. Select "Service" and confirm your
selection
3. The display shows a list of selected ser-
vice and maintenance procedures, as
well as legally-mandated inspections.
Red sectors
The service deadline has already passed.
Yellow sectors
The deadline for service or a legally-man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
contact your BMW center for an appoint-
ment.
Green sectors
No service is currently required. If you
desire, certain maintenance operations can
be carried out at the next service at the
customer's request.
You can request more detailed information
on every entry.
Turn the controller to scroll through the list,
then confirm the selected entry.
Select and confirm your selection or
turn the controller to exit the list.
Confirm to hide the display.
The service requirement display does
not continue counting down to the
next service during periods when the vehi-
cle is stored with the battery disconnected
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
or the battery switch OFF.
Please remember that brake fluid should be
changed every two years at the latest, even
if the display does not yet indicate that ser-
vice is required, refer to page 197.
This same precaution applies to all of the
other service and maintenance operations
scheduled according to periodic inter-
vals.<
Displaying and entering dates for
legally-mandated emission and
vehicle inspections
1. Select "Emissions inspection" or "State
inspection" and confirm your selection
2. Turn the controller to select date input
3. Confirm the inspection date. The first
part of the date entry is activated –
here month.
> Turn to reset
> Press to store and move to the next
entry – here year.
The system applies the date the last
time you store your entry
4. Press the controller to select "CON-
FIRM".
A requirement is that you have cor-
rectly set the date and time in the
Control Center, refer to page 90.<
Info Display screen contents
If the deadline for your next emissions or
state vehicle inspection is approaching, the
remaining distance and time will appear
briefly when you switch on the ignition.
Your Service Advisor will determine
your vehicle's current service require-
ments by reading out the data stored in the
vehicle's key.<
Check Control
Messages and indicator lamps in
Info Display
Messages and faults in systems appear in
text form accompanied by an indicator
lamp symbol. The alert is accompanied by
a gong. Messages disappear again auto-
matically if no faults are present.
Reports are assigned one of two priority
ratings:
Priority 1:
These status messages and malfunction
reports are signaled by a gong. Simulta-
neous defects will be displayed consecu-
tively. These messages cannot be deleted,
and they remain on the display until the
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything under control
84
problem is corrected. Supplementary infor-
mation is also shown on the Control Dis-
play, refer to Automatic display on Control
Display.
Priority 2:
These status messages and malfunction
reports appear on the Info Display for
approx. 20 seconds.
Briefly press the CHECK button on the turn
signal lever to cancel the message in the
display, if allowed by priority rating.
Requesting stored messages using Control
Center see there.
Check Control symbol and messages
on Control Display
Depending on the status of the mon-
itored systems, the Check Control symbol
is displayed in different colors.
Yellow or red
Faults are present in the monitored sys-
tems. Depending upon how serious the
problem is, a supplementary message may
also appear on the Control Display.
Requesting stored messages using Control
Center see there.
The symbol in the status line also indi-
cates the status of the service
requirement display, refer to page 23.<
Automatic display on Control Display
These supplementary messages are
intended to assist you in assessing the
severity of malfunctions; they provide you
with the information you need to decide on
the best way to respond.
Select and confirm your selection to
switch off the display.
Requesting stored messages using
Control Center
1. Select "Car data"
2. Select and confirm your
selection
3. Select "Check" and confirm your selec-
tion
4. The stored status reports appear on the
display. Select the desired report and
confirm your selection.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Confirm to hide the display.
Displays after completion of trip
Selected fault reports generated during the
trip are shown consecutively when you
switch off the ignition.
If indicated, the following message may
also appear:
"Parking lamps on!"
This message appears when you open the
driver's door after parking. A supplemen-
tary gong is also heard.
Even with the ignition and Info Display off,
you can reactivate the screen and display
the messages.
Press the CHECK button for approx.
8 seconds, refer to page 84. The stored
status reports appear again in the display. If
several messages are present, you can
continue to briefly press the CHECK button
to view them in succession.
The Check Control function
> cancels itself automatically after a brief
period
> can be canceled by again pressing the
CHECK button for approximately
8seconds.
You can select the language in which
Check Control status reports and
messages from the computer will appear,
refer to page 89.<
Computer
Requesting functions
You can use the buttons in the turn signal
lever to request a display from the com-
puter on the Info Display, starting at the
radio mode in the ignition lock.
1 Info Display on left
2 Info Display on right
A new function appears each time you
briefly press the button.
Displays on Info Display
The display sequence:
> Fuel gauge 86
> Range and remaining distance 86.
The display sequence:
> Odometer 81
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything under control
86
> Energy Control/
current fuel consumption 86
> Average fuel consumption 86
> Average speed 86
> Time of arrival 87.
Maintain pressure on button 1 to can-
cel the display from the computer.
Briefly press the button again to return to
the last display.
It will not be possible to cancel the display
if the fuel level has fallen into the reserve
range or if a Check Control status report is
currently on the screen.
Briefly press the button again to view the
last display.<
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge mode appears automati-
cally once the fuel level falls into the
reserve range. At the same time, the words
"Fuel reserve" appear. The tank still con-
tains approx. 2.6 gallons/10 liters of fuel.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies, when you are
driving in mountainous areas, for example,
the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
It will not be possible to cancel the
computer display once the fuel level
drops into the reserve range. However, you
can still request a display of the travel
range. Computer, refer to page 85.<
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 23.2 gallons/
88 liters. You can find information on refu-
eling on page 186.
Refuel well before the tank is empty,
as otherwise engine functions will not
be ensured and damage can occur if you
drive down to the last drop.<
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range avail-
able with the remaining fuel. The fuel level
is measured and the range is calculated
taking the driving style over the last
20 miles/30 km into account.
Always refuel as soon as possible
once your range falls to below
30 miles/50 km, as otherwise engine func-
tions are not ensured and damage can
occur.<
Refueling is only registered by the com-
puter for fuel amounts above approx.
1.3 gallons/5 liters.
Remaining distance
When you enter a destination in the naviga-
tion system or manually enter a distance in
the computer prior to departure, the system
can also display the distance remaining to
your destination, refer to page 132 or 87.
The system automatically applies the dis-
tance to your destination using the route
recommended by the navigation system.
When you enter a destination in the
navigation system, any manual entries
will be overwritten no later than once
1,640 ft/500 meters of the calculated dis-
tance have elapsed.<
Energy Control/
current fuel consumption
Shows the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current
driving style is conducive to fuel economy
with minimum exhaust emissions.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated
for the time during which the engine is run-
ning.
You can use the Control Display to view
your fuel consumption rate over two differ-
ent distances, refer to Computer or Trip
computer.
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the
engine off are not included in the calcula-
tions of average speed.
Reset average speed: Press button 2 in the
turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Time of arrival
A display of your estimated time of arrival is
available whenever you enter a destination
in the navigation system, refer to page 132,
or enter the distance manually in the com-
puter, refer to page 87, prior to departure.
A requirement is that you have cor-
rectly set the time in the Control Cen-
ter, refer to page 90.<
Control Display screen contents
You can activate the computer function at
any time by selecting it from the "Car data"
menu.
You have two possibilities to display infor-
mation of the computer:
> Computer
> Trip computer
Use this, for example, for driving on
vacation, as when you reset the values
to zero, all the functions are reset
together and then restart.
Computer
> Time of arrival
> Distance to destination.
Enter a destination in the navigation
system, or enter a distance in the com-
puter manually, refer to page 132 or 87
> Cruising range
> Average fuel consumption
> Average speed.
You can reset calculations of both
average speed and average fuel con-
sumption to zero. Select the menu item and
confirm your selection.<
Trip computer
Reset all data to zero:
Select "START / RESET" and confirm your
selection.
> Time of departure
> Driving time
> Elapsed distance
> Average fuel consumption since
"START / RESET"
> Average speed since "START /
RESET".
Entering a distance manually
1. Select "BC"
2. Select and activate the "Distance" entry
function. Turn the controller to the left
or right to select the distance to your
destination
3. Press the controller to confirm your
entry.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached
this speed. This enables you, for example,
to receive warnings if you exceed a speed
limit in an urban area.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything under control
88
You are only warned of reaching this speed
a second time if you again drive at least
3 mph/5 km/h slower.
Adjusting, changing
1. Select "Limit" and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Select "SET" and confirm your selection
3. Turn the controller to the left or right to
select the preset speed
4. Press the controller to confirm your
entry. The speed limit function is now
active.
Switching on or off
1. Select "Limit" and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Select "ON / OFF" and confirm your
selection. "ON / OFF" is highlighted
when the speed limit function is acti-
vated.
Applying your current speed as limit
1. Select "Limit" and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Select and confirm your selec-
tion. The system applies your current
speed as the limit.
Limit on Info Display
If, for instance, the warning sector in the
tachometer is visible, refer to page 81, the
speed limit will be indicated by a warning
sector in the speedometer, refer to arrow.
Stopwatch
Starting and stopping
1. Select and confirm your selection
2. Select and confirm your selection.
The stopwatch is reset to 0 and starts
3. Select and confirm your selection.
This stops the timer.
Confirm again to reset the stopwatch to
zero.
Taking an intermediate time reading
Select "INTERM. TIME" and confirm your
selection. This intermediate time appears
below the ongoing primary stopwatch
count.
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stop-
watch is running. The stopwatch continues
operation in the background.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Assistance window* for "Car data"
You can select any of the following com-
puter functions for display in the assistance
window:
> Computer
> Trip computer
> Speed limit
> Stopwatch.
Applying display
1. Select the desired function and confirm
– here, computer "BC"
2. Select and confirm your selec-
tion. The function appears in the assis-
tance window.
The symbol is highlighted if the
function displayed in the assis-
tance window is selected on the Con-
trol Display.<
You can also choose to view brief help
texts explaining selected menu items, refer
to page 22, or the travel route on vehicles
equipped with a GPS navigation system,
refer to page 131.
Changing settings
Units of measure and display format
You can select the units of measure used
in the displays of fuel consumption, dis-
tances, temperatures and pressures as
well as the display format for the time and
date.
1. Select and confirm your
selection
2. Select the menu item that you wish to
adjust. Press repeatedly to view a list-
ing of your selection options.
Language
You can select a different language for the
text displays.
1. Select and confirm your selection
2. Select and activate the desired lan-
guage.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything under control
90
Time and date
Select "Clock" and confirm your selection.
Setting time
Select "Time" and confirm your selection.
The first setting sector is highlighted.
> Turn to reset
> Press to store your entry and proceed
to the next setting.
The clock applies your entry the last
time you confirm your entry.
Switching on memo mode
You will hear four tones just before each
full hour.
> Select "Memo" and confirm your selec-
tion. "Memo" is highlighted when this
function is activated.
Setting date
Select "Date" and confirm your selection.
The first section of the date display is high-
lighted – here day.
> Turn to reset
> Press to store and highlight the next
entry – here month and year.
Your date is applied by the system the
last time you store your entry.
Brightness
You can set the brightness of the screen.
1. Select and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Select "Brightness" and confirm your
selection. Press and turn the controller
to make the adjustment.
With unfavorable conditions, e.g.
bright environment, the brightness
control of the screen might not be immedi-
ately recognizable.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Signal tones indicate the current distance
to an object behind or in front of your vehi-
cle. Four ultrasonic sensors in both the
bumpers monitor the distance to the near-
est object. The sensors at the front and at
the two rear corners have a range of
approx. 2 ft/60 cm; the rear middle sensors
have approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed,
as otherwise the physical circumstances
would mean that the system warning was
too late.<
Automatic function
Whenever the ignition is on the system
automatically assumes operational status
after a few seconds each time you engage
the transmission position R.
Wait this short period before revers-
ing.<
Switching on manually
Press the button, the indicator lamp lights
up.
Manual deactivation
Press the button again; the indicator lamp
goes out.
Automatic deactivation
The system is automatically deactivated
once the vehicle travels approx. 165 ft/
50 m or exceeds a speed of roughly
20 mph/30 km/h; the indicator lamp goes
out. You can reactivate the system manu-
ally as needed.
Signal tones
The signal indicating the distance to the
nearest obstacle is directional. Thus, an
object detected to the left rear of the vehi-
cle will be indicated by a signal tone from
the left rear speaker, etc. As the distance
between vehicle and object decreases, the
intervals between the tones become
shorter. The signal tone becomes continu-
ous once the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm.
The warning signal is canceled after
approx. 3 seconds if you are moving paral-
lel to a wall.
Malfunction
The indicator lamp within the button flashes
and a status message appears in the Check
Control. PDC has failed. Switch off PDC.
Have the system checked.
To prevent this problem, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to
ensure that they will continue to operate
effectively.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
92
PDC with visual warning
You also enjoy the option of having the sys-
tem show distances to objects on the Con-
trol Display. The Control Display will also
indicate the presence of objects in green
before they are close enough to generate a
signal tone.
Select "PDC pic." from the "Settings" menu
and confirm your selection. This activates
the PDC display.
The display then appears on the Control
Display whenever the PDC is automatically
or manually activated.
The previous display automatically reap-
pears after the system is deactivated.
confirm to return to the previous dis-
play.
System limits
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always
remains with the driver. Even when sensors
are involved, there is a blind spot in which
objects cannot be detected. The system is
also subject to the physical limits that apply
to all forms of ultrasonic measurement,
such as those encountered with tow bars
and trailer couplings, as well as thin and
wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
already displayed, e.g. a curb, can also dis-
appear from the detection area of the sen-
sors again before a continuous tone
sounds.
Loud noises from outside and inside the
vehicle may prevent you from hearing the
PDC's signal tone.<
Keep the sensors clean and free of ice
or snow in order to ensure that they
will continue to operate effectively.
Do not apply high pressure spray to the
sensors for a prolonged period of time.
Keep the spray at least 4 in/10 cm away
from the sensors.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended
array of systems designed to enhance and
maintain vehicle stability under extreme
conditions. The following section describes
these functions based on DSC and ABS.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS enhances active safety by preventing
the wheels from locking under braking.
ABS incorporates CBC and EBV.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow
and ABS is switched off. Conven-
tional braking efficiency remains
available without limitations. Have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
CBC is a supplement to ABS. It provides
further enhancements in vehicle stability
and steering response during lane changes
and cornering at high rates of lateral accel-
eration.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution
EBV controls the brake system's applica-
tion pressure at the rear wheels to ensure
stable deceleration.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The system optimizes vehicle stability dur-
ing acceleration and when starting from a
full stop, as well as optimizing traction.
The system recognizes any tendency for
the vehicle to assume an unstable attitude
such as oversteer or understeer; it then
counteracts this tendency with a combina-
tion of graduated reductions in engine
torque and selective braking intervention at
individual wheels. DSC provides optimized
stability within the limits defined by the
laws of physics.
The DSC is operational every time you start
the engine. DSC contains the functions
DTC Dynamic Traction Control and DBC
Dynamic Brake Control.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp goes out shortly
after the engine starts.
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC controls the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp stays lit:
DSC has been switched off using the Con-
trol Center.
Activating DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
In particular driving situations, in deep
snow, for example, DTC ensures the maxi-
mum forward momentum. The gain in for-
ward momentum in these situations
involves a reduction in vehicle stability.
DTC is active up to 45 mph/70 km/h.
You may find it useful to briefly activate
DTC under the following special circum-
stances:
> When rocking the vehicle and starting
off in deep snow or on loose road sur-
faces
> When ascending snow-covered hills,
and when driving in deep or on hard-
packed snow
> When driving with snow chains.
Select "Settings". Select "DTC" and con-
firm your selection. DTC is now activated.
The DTC indicator lamp in the Info Display
lights up permanently.
When DTC is active, DSC provides
only limited system response up to a
speed of approximately 45 mph/70 km/h.
Intervention for stability enhancement is
reduced.<
Deactivating DTC again
Select "Settings". Select "DTC" and con-
firm your selection. DTC is now deacti-
vated. The DTC indicator lamp in the Info
Display goes out. DSC is once again avail-
able without restriction.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
94
Switching off DSC
Select "Settings". Select "DSC" and con-
firm your selection. DSC is deactivated.
The indicator lamp in the Info Display
remains on continuously.
Deactivating DSC automatically deacti-
vates DTC as well. The systems for
enhancing stability and traction are deacti-
vated, and there is no active braking inter-
vention or torque control.
A status report appears in the Check Con-
trol. Please take note of the additional infor-
mation on the Control Display.
To maintain optimized stability, drive
with the system on whenever possi-
ble.<
Reactivating DSC
Select "Settings". Select "DSC" and con-
firm your selection. DSC is now activated.
The indicator lamp in the Info Display goes
out.
The laws of physics cannot be
repealed, even with DSC. An appro-
priate driving style always remains the
responsibility of the driver. Avoid using the
additional safety margin provided by the
system as an excuse for taking unneces-
sary risks.
When DTC is active, DSC provides only
limited system response up to a speed of
approximately 45 mph/70 km/h. Interven-
tion for stability enhancement is reduced.
Do not make any modifications to the DSC
system. Never allow anyone other than
authorized professional technicians to
carry out service or repairs on the DSC sys-
tem.<
DBC Dynamic Brake Control
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this
system automatically produces the maxi-
mum braking force boost and thus helps to
achieve the shortest possible braking dis-
tance during panic stops. This system
exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake
pedal for the duration of the brake applica-
tion. When the brake pedal is released, the
DBC is deactivated.
Malfunction in vehicle stability
control systems
The brake system warning lamp
lights up in red, appearing together
with the indicator lamps for ABS
and DSC. A status report appears in
the Check Control. Please take note
of the additional information on the
Control Display. Driving stability
control and ABS have failed. Con-
ventional braking efficiency remains avail-
able without limitations.
While you may continue, you should
remember to proceed cautiously and drive
defensively while avoiding full brake appli-
cations. Have the system checked as soon
as possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
The DSC warning lamp lights up.
DSC and DTC have failed. Their sta-
bilizing interventions are no longer
available. The vehicle will remain com-
pletely operational, however, without DSC.
Have the system checked as soon as pos-
sible.
The brake system warning lamp
lights up yellow and a message
appears in the Check Control.
Please take note of the additional informa-
tion on the Control Display. DBC has failed.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Have the system checked as soon as pos-
sible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
Dynamic Drive
The concept
Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and
optimizes vehicle stability during cornering
and evasive maneuvers.
Active stabilizers at the front and rear axles
form the basis for Dynamic Drive. Suspen-
sion compliance adapts to suit driving con-
ditions, varying from performance-oriented
during cornering to smooth and comfort-
oriented when the vehicle is proceeding in
a straight line.
The system assumes operational status
each time you start the engine.
Driving with Dynamic Drive
During vehicle operation, the system con-
tinuously runs through closed-loop control
cycles lasting only fractions of a second.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up, accom-
panied by a status message in the
Check Control. Please take note of
the additional information on the Control
Display. A malfunction has occurred in the
system. Have the system checked as soon
as possible.
If the Dynamic Drive system switches
off in response to malfunction, please
remember to adapt your speed accord-
ingly, especially in curves.
The suspension will be noticeably softer
and the vehicle will display a greater ten-
dency to tilt during cornering and in cross-
winds.
If a Check Control message stating that you
should stop appears in addition to the red
symbol, stop immediately and switch off
the engine. In this case the oil level in the
reservoir may have dropped below the min-
imum, possibly owing to a leak in the
hydraulic system.
Please observe the additional instructions
provided on the Control Display.<
EDC Electronic Damping
Control*
The suspension responds to changes in
factors such as road surface, or operating
conditions such as steering and braking, by
adapting to the new conditions within frac-
tions of a second.
Two programs are available; they can be
selected in the "Settings" menu.
Comfort mode
The Comfort mode is suitable for use
throughout the vehicle's entire speed range
and regardless of load.
Sport program
You should select the Sport program for
consistently performance-oriented
response from shock absorbers and steer-
ing.
Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the
inflation pressures in the four fitted tires as
you drive. The system provides an alert
whenever the inflation pressure drops sig-
nificantly in relation to the pressure another
tire.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
96
The check of the tire inflation pressure is
based on monitoring the relative speeds of
the wheels. A flat tire is detected and
reported on the basis of a deviation in cer-
tain speed ratios.
Functional requirements
So that the Flat Tire Monitor can learn the
correct inflation pressure, please perform
the following:
1. Check the inflation pressures in all tires
2. Compare with the inflation pressure
table on page 189 and correct if neces-
sary
3. Initialize the system.
System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natu-
ral, even pressure drop in all four tires.<
In the following situations, on the other
hand, there can be delays in detecting tire
pressure losses, and even system failure:
> When you are driving on snow-covered
or slippery road surfaces
> In the case of performance-oriented
driving: slip on the drive wheels, high
lateral acceleration
> False alarms and undetected loss of
pressure may occur when you are driv-
ing with snow chains fitted.
Initializing system
Perform the initialization immediately
after correcting the inflation pressure,
changing a tire or changing a wheel or all
wheels. A drive is necessary for this pur-
pose.<
1. Start the engine, but do not drive off
2. Select "RPA" from the "Settings" menu
and confirm your selection. The initial-
ization menu appears
3. Select "SET" and confirm your selection
4. Drive off.
"FTM is being initialized" is displayed as the
status.
It takes at least 10 minutes before the Flat
Tire Monitor can detect and report a flat
tire.
When driving with snow chains, do
not initialize the system.<
Select and confirm to exit from the
menu.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red,
accompanied by a status message
in the Check Control. In addition, an
acoustic signal sounds. A flat tire or a major
air loss has occurred.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle
carefully. Avoid sudden braking and
steering maneuvers
2. Identify damaged tire
If identification is not possible,
contact your BMW center.<
3. Replace the damaged tire, refer to
Changing wheels on page 204.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Vehicles with run-flat tires:
1. Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to
below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden
braking and steering maneuvers. Do not
exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph/80
km/h
Due to the reinforcement on the
side walls of the run-flat tires,
inflation pressure loss can not usually
be recognized from the outside, refer to
Run-flat tires on page 206.<
2. To continue driving, comply with the
instructions for driving with damaged
tires on page 206.
Malfunction
The indicator lamp lights up yellow,
accompanied by a status message
in the Check Control. The Flat Tire
Monitor has malfunctioned or failed. Have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Self-leveling suspension*
Malfunction
A Check Control message appear-
ing together with this symbol indi-
cates a malfunction in the self-level-
ing suspension. Please take note of the
additional information on the Control Dis-
play.
Stop and inspect the vehicle. If the rear of
the vehicle is visibly lower than the front,
possibly accompanied by a tilt noticeable
when you compare the left rear with the
right rear, please respond by immediately
proceeding to the nearest BMW center.
Drive with appropriate caution in the mean-
time. The vehicle has reduced ground
clearance and driving comfort may be
noticeably reduced. Even if the attitude of
the vehicle is normal, you should consult
the nearest BMW center if the warning
lamp indicates a system fault.
Brake Force Display
The Brake Force Display indicates the
intensity with which you are applying your
brakes to drivers of following vehicles.
The display consists of two stages:
> Normal braking:
The brake lamps in the tail lamp assem-
blies and the high-mount brake lamp on
the rear tray light up during braking
> Heavy braking and braking with ABS:
The rear lamps also light up with the
same intensity as the standard brake
lamp units to enhance the warning
effect of the brake lamps.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
98
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags for driver and front pas-
senger
2 Head airbags in front and rear
3 Side airbags in front and rear
*
4 Knee airbags for driver and front pas-
senger
Protective effect
The front airbags help protect the driver
and front passenger by responding to fron-
tal impacts in which safety belts alone can-
not provide adequate restraint. When
needed, the head and side airbags help
provide protection in the event of side
impact. The side airbags help restrain the
side of the occupant's upper torso, and the
head airbags help support the head while
also helping provide protection against any
objects penetrating into the passenger
compartment. The knee airbags help pro-
tect the legs against impact against the
cockpit.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe
accidents, certain roll-over conditions, or
rear-end collisions.
The rear seat side airbags may
already have been deactivated by a
BMW center. Labels in the rear door open-
ing should indicate the status of your rear
seat side airbags. If you are uncertain of
their status, or wish to have the airbags
activated or deactivated, please contact
your BMW center.<
For information on the correct sitting posi-
tion, refer to page 46.
Do not apply adhesive materials to
the cover panels of the airbags, cover
them or modify them in any other way.
Do not attempt to remove the airbag reten-
tion system from the vehicle. Never modify
or tamper with either the wiring or the indi-
vidual components in the airbag system.
This category includes the upholstery in the
center of the steering wheel, on the instru-
ment panel, the doors and the roof pillars
along with the sides of the headliner. Do
not attempt to remove or dismantle the
steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components
directly after the system has been trig-
gered, because there is a danger of burns.
In case of malfunctions, storage or after the
airbag restraint system has been triggered,
only have checking, repair or dismantling
and the scrapping of the airbag generators
carried out by a BMW center or a workshop
that uses personnel trained in accordance
with BMW requirements and equipped with
the required explosives permits. Unprofes-
sional attempts to service the system could
lead to failure in an emergency or undes-
ired airbag activation, either of which could
result in personal injury.<
Airbag warning information is also provided
on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
Your BMW has a seat occupation detection
system. By evaluating the weight on the
front passenger‘s seat, the system detects
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
whether or not the seat is occupied by a
child in the child-restraint system or an
adult.
> When a child is seated in the child-
restraint system or with an empty seat,
the front and side airbags are automat-
ically deactivated on the passenger's
side
> When an adult is traveling in the front
seat, the front and side airbags remain
active on the passenger side.
Although not desired, it can occur in
the case of heavier children that the
front passenger airbags remain active or in
the case of very light adults or young per-
sons that the front passenger airbags are
deactivated.
The state of the front passenger airbags is
shown with the indicator lamp, refer to Indi-
cator lamps in the following. In this case
transport the corresponding persons on the
rear seat.
Except when persons to be transported, do
not increase the load on the front passen-
ger seat with additional items. Do not fit
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball
mats or other items to the front passenger
seat unless they are specifically recom-
mended by BMW. Do not place any items
under the seat. Otherwise, the function of
the seat occupation detection could be
impaired.<
Indicator lamps
Airbag system ready for use
The warning lamp indicates the operational
readiness of the entire airbag system and
the safety belt tensioners from the radio
position: the warning lamp goes out after
afew seconds.
The indicator lamp above the interior rear-
view mirror indicates whether the front-pas-
senger airbag system is activated or deacti-
vated as of ignition key radio position.
The indicator lamp refers exclusively
to the front-passenger airbag sys-
tem.<
> The indicator lamp goes out after a few
seconds.
The front passenger airbags are active,
e.g. when transporting an adult
> The indicator lamp lights up continu-
ously. The front passenger airbags are
deactivated, e.g. when transporting a
child in the child-restraint system or
when the seat is unoccupied.
For more information on the operating prin-
ciple of the front passenger airbag system
and seat occupation detection, refer to
Automatic deactivation of the front passen-
ger airbags.
Airbag system malfunction
Have the airbag system checked
immediately if a malfunction occurs,
as otherwise there is a danger of the sys-
tem failing to respond in the expected man-
ner to an impact occurring within its normal
response range.<
A fault has occurred in the airbag
system:
> The warning lamp fails to come on as of
ignition radio mode
> Warning lamp lights up continuously
> Warning lamp lights during driving.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Lamps
100
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
Parking lamps
With the switch in this position, the
front, rear and side vehicle lighting
is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking. For lighting on
one side for parking as an additional fea-
ture, refer to page 101.
Low beams
When you switch off the ignition
with the headlamps on, the head-
lamps go out, and only the parking
lamps remain on.
Pathway lighting
After parking the vehicle and switch-
ing off the headlamps, you can use
the headlamp flasher control to activate
the low beams for a period of roughly
40 seconds. Pressing the button 4 on the
remote control, refer to page 36, also
switches on the low beams for approx.
40 seconds. In addition, the door handle
and interior lamps are switched on for
approx. 10 seconds.
You can have the lighting up of the low
beams extended or the function deacti-
vated.<
Lights on warning
If you switch off the ignition while the head-
lamps are on, when you subsequently open
the driver's door a gong will sound for sev-
eral seconds, while the Check Control will
provide you with a message
.
Daytime driving lamps*
If you wish, you can leave the light switch in
the low-beam position.
Always observe all applicable laws govern-
ing the use of daytime driving lamps.
You can switch on the parking lamps when
needed using the standard procedure
described under Parking lamps.
You can have the daytime driving
lamps on your vehicle programmed
to operate as desired.<
Automatic headlamp control
When you set the switch to this
position, the system activates and
switches on and off the low beams
in response to changes in ambient light
conditions, for instance, in tunnels, at dawn
and dusk, and in rain and snow. The green
indicator lamp next to the symbol is illumi-
nated when the low beams are on.
The low beams remain switched on
regardless of the ambient light when
you switch on the front fog lamps.<
The automatic headlamp control can-
not serve as a substitute for your per-
sonal judgment in determining when the
lamps should be switched on in response
to ambient lighting conditions. For exam-
ple, the system cannot detect fog. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on
the lamps manually under these condi-
tions.<
You can have the sensitivity of the
headlamp control system adjusted on
your vehicle.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumi-
nation of the road surface. Depending on
the steering angle and other assumptions,
the light from the headlamp follows the
course of the road.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition on, refer to
page 62, turn the light switch to the
position 'Automatic headlamp con-
trol', refer to page 100.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the
Adaptive Head Light:
> Is not active when driving in reverse
> Is only active toward the passenger's
side with the vehicle stationary.
Malfunction
The LED above the symbol for automatic
headlamp control flashes. Adaptive Head
Light is faulty or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
High beams/standing lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Standing lamps
Standing lamps, left and right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just
one side of your vehicle when parking:
With the ignition off, press the lever in the
desired direction 3, beyond the resistance
point.
Front fog lamps
Briefly press the button once again to
switch on/off.
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on for the fog
lamps to operate. The green indica-
tor lamp in the Info Display lights up when-
ever the fog lamps are on.
If the automatic headlamp control is
activated, the low beams will come on
automatically when you switch on the fog
lamps.<
Instrument lighting
Turn the serrated dial to adjust the illumina-
tion intensity.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Lamps
102
Interior lamps
Control of the interior lamps, footwell
lamps, courtesy lamps and ground lamps
is automatic.
Switching interior lamps on and off
Briefly press button.
If you want the interior lamps to remain off
continuously, maintain pressure on the but-
ton for approx. 3 seconds.
To revert to normal operation, briefly press
the button.
The button for the interior lamps in the rear
passenger area only switches these lamps
on and off.
Reading lamps
Reading lamps are provided in the front
and rear, adjacent to the interior lamps.
They can be switched on and off with the
respective button located next to the them.
To avoid discharging the battery, all of
the vehicle's interior lamps are auto-
matically extinguished approx. 15 minutes
after the ignition is switched off.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
A congenial climate
Automatic climate control
1 Automatic climate control
2 Airflow directed toward the windshield
and side windows
3 Air for upper body area
The serrated dials in the center open
and close through an infinitely-variable
range to control air supply while also
adjusting the air's direction like the
lower serrated dials. You can find more
information on adjusting for draft-free
ventilation on page 108
4 Air to footwell
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
A congenial climate
104
1 Automatic air distribution and supply,
left side of passenger
compartment 107
2 Outside air/AUC Automatic recircu-
lated-air control/recirculated air 105
3 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 105
4 Temperature, left side of passenger
compartment 105
5 Maximum cooling 105
6 Air supply, left side of passenger
compartment 105
7 Switching off automatic climate
control 107
8 Air supply, right side of passenger
compartment 105
9 Temperature, right side of passenger
compartment 105
10 Residual heat mode 105
11 Rear window defroster
12 Switching air conditioner mode on and
off manually 105
13 Automatic air distribution and supply,
right side of passenger
compartment 107
14 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
15 Independent ventilation 110
> Activation time activated: the indica-
tor lamp comes on
> Independent ventilation switched on:
the indicator lamp flashes
All other setting options for the auto-
matic climate control can be found at
"Settings" using the Control Center, refer to
page 107.
The current settings for temperature and air
supply are displayed to you in the status
line of the Control Display.
A description of the Control Center is pro-
vided on page 17.<
A congenial climate
Activate the automatic mode using the
AUTO button or "AUTO" in the Control
Center, refer to page 107. Select an interior
temperature you find pleasant.
The following section contains more
detailed information on the available set-
ting options.
All of the air conditioning functions,
including Maximum cooling, refer to
page 105, and the Rear air conditioner,
refer to page 109, are available only when
the engine is running.<
Your vehicle has been designed to
automatically select your personal
climate-control settings whenever you
unlock the doors using your individually
programmed remote control.<
Automatic air distribution and supply
The AUTO program adjusts the
airflow and distribution patterns
for you while also using your
preselected temperature setting as the
basis for adjusting the interior climate to
adapt to external influences: summer, win-
ter.
The air conditioner comes on automatically
when you select the AUTO program.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Temperature adjustment
You can turn to select the
desired temperatures for the
driver's and passenger sides.
Your settings appear on the
Control Display's status line.
The figures in the display provide a general
indication of interior temperature. When
you start the vehicle, this system ensures
that the selected temperature is achieved
as quickly as possible. It then maintains this
temperature, regardless of the season.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
This program quickly removes
ice and condensation from the
windshield and door windows.
Adjusting air supply manually
You can adjust the air supply by
turning. The automatic air sup-
ply control is operational when-
ever you see your selection rep-
resented by a bar on the
Control Display's status line. The automatic
air distribution remains in operation as
before. You can reactivate the automatic air
supply mode with the AUTO button.
Switching air conditioner mode on
and off manually
The air conditioner cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before also reheating it as
required, according to temperature setting.
Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog over briefly when the engine is
started.
The air conditioner comes on automatically
when you select the AUTO program.
Maximum cooling
This program quickly provides
maximum cooling.
The temperature display reverts
to 607/166 while the system
switches to the recirculated-air mode and
starts to provide maximum air supply
through the vent outlets only. For this rea-
son you should ensure that these outlets
are open before selecting this program.
Outside air/AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control/recirculated
air
You can respond to unpleasant
odors or pollutants in the imme-
diate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air.
The system then recirculates the air cur-
rently within the vehicle. AUC executes this
function automatically.
Press the button repeatedly to run through
the following control sequence:
> Indicator lamps off: outside air flows
into the vehicle
> Left indicator lamp on, AUC mode: the
system detects pollutants in the outside
air and responds by blocking the supply
of outside air when required. The sys-
tem then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Depending upon air quality, in the auto-
matic mode the system may start to
alternate between its outside-air and
recirculated-air modes
> Right indicator lamp on, recirculated-air
mode: the supply of outside air into the
vehicle is permanently blocked. The
system then recirculates the air cur-
rently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during opera-
tion in the recirculated-air mode, you
should switch it off while also increasing air
supply as required.<
Residual heat mode
The system uses the warmth
stored in the engine to heat the
interior when the ignition is off,
for instance, while the vehicle
is stopped at a school to pick
up a child.
You can adjust the automatic climate con-
trol's settings when the ignition lock is in
the radio mode. The system blows heated
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
A congenial climate
106
air into the interior in accordance with the
selected distribution pattern while the igni-
tion is off.
Provided that the engine has warmed
to its normal operating temperature
and the battery is charged, you can use this
function for up to 15 minutes after switch-
ing off the ignition. The LED within the but-
ton lights up to confirm compliance with
both of these conditions.<
Front ventilation
You can adjust the vent outlets for the
upper body to suit your personal require-
ments.
You can use the serrated dials 1 to open
and close the outlets through an infinitely-
variable range, while the serrated dials 2
allow you to adjust the airflow direction.
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vents to direct t h e flow of co o l air
in your direction, for instance, if the interior
has become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows
past you and is not directed straight at you.
You can also individually adjust the air
temperature of the air vents for the
upper body area in the Control Center,
refer to page 108.
If the ventilation grill is completely closed,
the vehicle interior is ventilated indirectly
by air vents on the upper side of the cock-
pit.<
Ventilation for storage compartment
in front armrest
You can use the serrated dial in the storage
compartment to open and close the vent.
Depending upon the temperatures
selected at the rear dials, high tem-
peratures may occur in the storage com-
partment. Close the vent as required.<
Ventilation in the rear
The serrated dials 1 allow you to open and
close the ventilation outlets through an infi-
nitely-variable range.
You can adjust the airflow direction using
the levers 2.
The serrated dials 3
*
control the amount of
cooled air in the flow from the vent outlets:
Turn towards blue: colder
Turn towards red: warmer.
This function allows you to make minor
adjustments for maximum comfort while
also letting you vary temperatures within
the storage compartment.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching off automatic climate
control*
The air supply, the heater and
the air conditioner are all
switched off. You can restart
the automatic climate control
by pressing any of its buttons
except the REST button.
Settings using Control Center
With the ignition on, select "Climate". You
can use the Control Center to set the fol-
lowing:
> "Left
Χ
Right":
Separate settings for driver and front
passenger
> Adjusting and adapting air-distribution
patterns, refer to the next column
> Adjusting temperature for the upper
body, refer to page 108
> Storing and calling up an individual set-
ting for interior ventilation outlets, air
distribution and temperature, refer to
page 108.
Select the second page of the "Cli-
mate" menu.
> "Indep. ventil.":
For information on activating and deac-
tivating the independent ventilation and
setting the timer, refer to page 110
> "Seat temp.":
Adjusting temperature distribution
while the seat heaters are on, refer to
page 52
> "Extra":
Switching the rear air conditioning or
rear cooler on and off, refer to
pages 109 and 114.
Select the first page of the "Climate"
menu.
Automatic air distribution and supply
"AUTO":
The AUTO program adjusts the airflow and
distribution patterns for you while also
using your preselected temperature setting
as the basis for adjusting the interior cli-
mate to adapt to external influences: sum-
mer, winter.
"Bi-Level":
This program operates in the same way as
the AUTO program, but with airflow
directed toward upper body and into the
footwells.
Combining air distribution yourself
You can cancel the AUTO program by
selecting specific air distribution patterns
for your personal comfort.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
A congenial climate
108
Adjusting air distribution
You also enjoy the option of adjusting the
air distribution manually to obtain a climate
that is ideally adapted to your personal
requirements. The AUTO program is deac-
tivated.
Select the desired symbol and confirm your
selection. Turn the controller to adjust the
air distribution.
Air on windshield and side
windows.
Air to the upper body. You
can also adjust individually
the air temperature of the vent outlets for
the upper body, see below.
Air to footwell.
Adjusting temperature the upper
body
This function provides you with the option
of making minor adjustments to achieve
maximum comfort.
Use the temperature setting to adjust the
amount of cool air that is added to the air-
flow emerging from the vent outlets for the
upper body. We recommend a moderate
temperature setting, as cooler air helps
promote fatigue-free driving.
Storing and calling up an individual
setting
You can store your individual setting after
adjusting the air distribution manually.
Select "Memorize" and confirm your selec-
tion.
Now you can reselect the preset climate
that precisely reflects your personal
requirements.
Select "Individual" and confirm your selec-
tion. The AUTO program is deactivated.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen
from the incoming air. The activated-char-
coal filter provides additional protection by
filtering gaseous pollutants from the out-
side air. Your BMW center replaces this
combined filter as a standard part of your
scheduled maintenance.
You can select a display of more detailed
information in the service requirement dis-
play, refer to page 82.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Rear air conditioner*
The following settings and operating
modes can be selected and adjusted sepa-
rately on the left and right sides:
1 Adjusting cooling
2 Maximum cooling
3 Adjusting air supply manually
4 Switching off rear air conditioner
Switching on rear air conditioner
To switch on the rear air conditioner
> select maximum cooling 2
> press the OFF button 4 again
> select "Rear air cond." in the Control
Center and confirm, refer to Switching
on and off using the Control Center.
When you switch on the rear air con-
ditioner, you simultaneously switch
on the rear cooler, refer to page 114.<
Adjusting cooling
You can also set the system to
provide the desired level of
cooling by turning. We recom-
mend setting the system for
moderate cooling. When you
start the vehicle, this system ensures that
the selected setting is achieved as quickly
as possible. It then maintains this tempera-
ture, regardless of the season.
Adjusting air supply manually
You can adjust the air supply by
turning.
Maximum cooling
This program quickly provides
maximum cooling.
The system automatically switches to the
recirculated-air mode while a high-speed
stream of air simultaneously emerges from
the vent outlets. For this reason you should
ensure that these outlets are open before
selecting this program.
Switching off rear air conditioner
The air conditioner is switched
off.
Press the button again to switch back on.
Switching on/off using Control
Center
1. With the ignition on, select "Climate"
2. Select and confirm the selection
to change to the second page of the
"Climate" menu
3. Select "Extra" and confirm your selec-
tion
4. Select "Rear air cond." and confirm
your selection.
The maximum cooling mode is auto-
matically activated when you switch
on the rear air conditioner in the Control
Center.<
Select "Rear air cond." again and confirm
your selection to switch off the system.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
A congenial climate
110
Rear ventilation
Use the lever 1 to vary the airflow direction.
For additional information on rear ventila-
tion options, refer to page 106.
Independent ventilation
System operation is controlled using the
Control Center. You can set two different
times for the system to start.
The independent ventilation blows air into
the passenger compartment to lower inte-
rior temperatures.
The system remains on for 30 minutes. You
can also switch the system on and off man-
ually. Since the system uses a substantial
amount of electrical current, you should
refrain from activating it twice in succes-
sion without allowing the battery to be
recharged in normal operation between
use.
The independent ventilation is available for
preprogrammed operation at outside tem-
peratures above approx. 59 7/156 and
for direct activation at any temperature, but
is not operational when the vehicle is
underway.
The air enters the passenger compartment
through the vent outlets in the dashboard,
which can be adjusted for both direction
and airflow. These outlets must be open for
the system to operate.
Switching on and off directly
1. Activate the radio mode at the ignition
lock
2. Select "Indep. ventil." on the second
page of the "Climate" menu and confirm
your selection.
Select "Indep. ventil" a second time and
confirm to deactivate the system manually.
Preselecting switch-on time
You can preselect two activation times.
1. Activate the radio mode at the ignition
lock
2. Select "Indep. ventil." on the second
page of the "Climate" menu.
3. Select "Set time 1" or "Set time 2" and
confirm your selection
4. Enter the desired time
> Turn: set
> Press: confirm.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Activating timer
Select "Switch. time 1" or "Switch. time 2"
and confirm your selection.
The independent ventilation is only
available for activation within the sub-
sequent 24 hours. After this, the time will
have to be reconfirmed.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
112
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held trans-
mitters for various remote-controlled
accessories, such as door openers and
house alarm systems. The integrated uni-
versal remote control registers and stores
signals from the original hand-held trans-
mitters.
The signal of an original hand-held trans-
mitter can be programmed on one of the
three memory keys 1. Following that, each
of the devices can be actuated with the
appropriately-programmed memory key 1.
The indicator lamp 2 flashes to confirm
transmission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be
sure to delete the stored programs before-
hand for your safety, refer to page 113.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always
inspect the immediate area to make certain
that no people, animals or objects are
within the swiveling and movement range
of the device. Also, comply with the safety
precautions of the original hand-held trans-
mitter.<
Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the pack-
aging or in the manual supplied with
the original hand-held transmitter, it
is safe to assume that it is compatible with
the integrated universal remote control.
If you have additional questions,
please consult your BMW center or
call 1-800-355-3515.
You can also visit these websites:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark owned
by Johnson Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory keys
2 Indicator lamp
Fixed-code hand-held transmitter
1. Switch on the ignition
2. When using for the first time: press both
outer keys 1 for approx. 20 seconds,
maintaining pressure until the indicator
lamp 2 starts to flash. The three mem-
ory keys 1 are cleared
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter
at a distance of approx. 2 in/5 cm to
8 in/20 cm from the memory keys 1
The required distance between
the hand-held transmitter and
memory keys 1 depends on the relevant
system of the original hand-held trans-
mitter used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key
on the original hand-held transmitter
and the desired memory key 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
Initially, the indicator lamp 2 flashes
slowly. Release both keys as soon as
the indicator 2 lamp flashes rapidly. If
the indicator lamp 2 does not flash rap-
idly after approx. 15 seconds, change
the distance
5. To program other original hand-held
transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
113
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The corresponding memory key 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
The device can be operated as of ignition
on.
If the device can not be operated
after repeated programming, check
whether the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. To do so,
either read the instructions of the original
hand-held transmitter or press and hold
down the programmed memory key 1 of
the integrated universal remote control.
If the indicator lamp 2 on the integrated
universal remote control flashes quickly
for a brief period and then remains lit up
for approx. two seconds, this indicates
that the original hand-held transmitter is
equipped with an alternating-code system.
In the case of an alternating-code system,
program the memory keys 1 as described
at the section on alternating-code transmit-
ters.<
Alternating-code transmitters
Consult the operating instructions of the
unit you wish to set when programming the
universal remote control. You will find infor-
mation there on the possibilities for syn-
chronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please
observe the following supplementary
instructions:
Programming will be easier with the
aid of a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device
2. Program the integrated universal
remote control as described at the sec-
tion on fixed-code hand-held transmit-
ters
3. Localize the key on the receiver of the
device you want to set up, e.g. on the
upper section of the motor
4. Press the key on the receiver of the
device you want to set up. After step 4,
you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5
5. Press the programmed memory key 1
on the integrated universal remote con-
trol three times.
The corresponding memory key 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any additional questions,
please contact your BMW center.<
Clearing memory keys
Individual memory keys 1 can not be
cleared. However, you clear all three mem-
ory keys 1 together as follows:
Press both outer keys 1 of the integrated
universal remote control for approx.
20 seconds, maintaining pressure until the
indicator lamp 2 starts to flash.
Roller sun blinds*
Rear window blind
To actuate as of radio mode, briefly press
the button in the driver's door.
Roller sun blinds for rear side
windows
Activate by briefly pressing the desired but-
ton with the ignition lock as of radio mode.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
114
1 Quarter window blind
2 Side window blind
3 Rear window blind
4 Switching to the other side
The side window blind can not be
extended unless the side window is
closed. If the window is open, the blind will
rise slightly prior to immediately retracting
to its original position.<
Briefly press the safety switch in the
driver's door, refer to page 44. The
indicator lamp must light up. This precau-
tion prevents children from operating the
sun blinds using the rear switches, etc.
Before using always ensure that the sun
blind's travel path is clear and unob-
structed.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the remote control from the ignition lock
and close the doors; this precaution pre-
vents children from using the sun blinds
and injuring themselves, etc.<
Automatically extending and
retracting sun blinds
You can extend and retract the sun blinds
together by pressing and holding button 3
or the button in the driver's door.
Rear cooler*
The rear cooler is located behind the rear
seats' center armrest.
Switching on/off
From radio mode, press the button until the
indicator lamp in the button lights up.
Vehicles with rear air conditioner:
Once switched on, the rear cooler
operates whenever the engine is running.
High temperatures in the luggage compart-
ment can affect the temperature in the rear
cooler.
Vehicles without rear air conditioner:
After the ignition has been switched off, the
rear cooler is switched off automatically
after a short period.
When a low voltage is reached, it is auto-
matically switched off to protect the vehicle
battery. The indicator lamp in the button
flashes.
In the event of a malfunction, please con-
tact your BMW center.<
Press the button again to switch off the rear
cooler.
Opening
Pull on the opener and fold the cooler box
forward.
Switching on/off using Control
Center*
When the rear air conditioner unit is
switched on, the rear cooler operates
whenever the engine is running.<
1. With the ignition on, select "Climate"
2. Select the second page of the
"Climate" menu
3. Select "Extra" and confirm your selec-
tion
4. Select "Rear refr. box" and confirm your
selection.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
115
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Select "Rear refr. box" a second time and
confirm to switch the unit off.
Glove compartment
Opening
Press button. The glove compartment
opens automatically and the lamps come
on.
Closing
Fold the cover up.
To prevent injury in the event of an
accident, close the glove compart-
ment immediately after use.<
Rechargeable flashlight
The flashlight is located on the left side of
the glove compartment.
It features integral overload protection, so it
can be left in its holder continuously.
Be sure that the flashlight is switched
off when it is inserted into its holder.
Failure to comply with this precaution could
lead to overcharging and damage.<
Front center armrest
A storage compartment is located in the
armrest between the front seats.
1 Open the right cover
2 Open the left cover
A removable coin holder is provided in the
front of the compartment. Briefly press to
open.
The mat within the compartment can be
removed for cleaning.
Depending upon your model specification,
any of the following may be located in the
storage compartment:
> Removable CD holder
*
> Fold-out and removable storage com-
partment
*
, e.g. for glasses or portable
phone
> Fold-out and removable litter con-
tainer
*
.
Locking storage compartment in
front armrest
You can use the key to lock the storage
compartment in the armrest.
You can lock the luggage compart-
ment lid and the armrest storage
compartment separately, refer to page 40,
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
116
and then retain the key in your possession
while handing over only the remote control
when leaving the vehicle for valet parking
etc., refer to page 34; this prevents unau-
thorized access to the luggage and front
storage compartments.<
Ventilating storage compartment in
front armrest
You can use the serrated dial in the storage
compartment to open and close the vent.
Depending on the automatic climate
control setting, the temperature
within the storage compartment may be
higher than in the rest of the interior.
Close the vent as required.<
Storage compartments
Glasses compartment
To open the compartment:
Briefly press the button.
You can remove the insert tray for cleaning.
Storage compartment in center
console
To open the compartment:
Briefly press the button.
Clothes hooks
When suspending clothing from the
hooks ensure that it will not obstruct
the driver's vision. Do not hang heavy
objects on the hooks. If you do so, they
could cause personal injury to occupants
during braking or evasive maneuvers.<
Beverage holders
Front
Below the sliding covers.
Do not place glass containers in the
beverage holders, as otherwise there
is a danger of injury in an accident.<
Rear
In the front of the rear seat cushion's
center.
Briefly press to open; slide back to close.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
117
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Ashtray, front
Opening
Slide back the cover by the recess.
To extinguish a cigarette, tap off the ash
and gently press the tip into the funnel.
Emptying
Press the button, refer to arrow 1. The ash-
tray rises for removal.
Cigarette lighter, front
Push down.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it
jumps back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter
by the knob only. Holding or touching
it in other areas could result in burns.
The cigarette lighter is also ready for oper-
ation when the remote control is unlocked.
For this reason, do not leave unsupervised
children in the vehicle.<
Power socket
The cigarette lighter socket can be used
with the ignition switched on to plug in
hand flashlights, car vacuum cleaners etc.
with power ratings of up to approx. 200 W
at 12 V. Avoid damaging the socket due to
inserting plugs of different shapes or sizes.
With the ignition switched off, the
power supply to all electrical sockets
is cut off after approx. one hour.<
Power socket
An additional power socket is located in the
front passenger's footwell.
To gain access, fold the cover cap up.
Ashtray, rear
Emptying
Press the cover entirely down. The ashtray
rises for removal.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
118
Cigarette lighter, rear
Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.
Rear center armrest
Before folding down the armrest,
adjust the head restraint to its lowest
position, refer to page 50.<
To open the storage compartment:
Press the button in the handle recess and
fold up the cover.
Comfort seat in rear
Before folding down the armrest,
adjust the head restraint to its lowest
position, refer to page 50.<
To open the storage compartment:
Press the button and fold up the cover.
Ski bag*
Designed for safe, convenient transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2snowboards.
The ski bag itself plus the additional capac-
ity provided by the luggage compartment
make it possible to transport skis with a
length of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of
6.9 ft/2.10 m in length are loaded the ski
bag will tend to contract, reducing its over-
all capacity.
Loading
1. Lower the center armrest, open the
cover and place it on the armrest
2. Remove the cover panel
*
and place it
on the controller in the rear
3. To open the hatch in the luggage com-
partment:
Press the handle and slide it to the right
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Controls
119
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Extend the ski bag between the front
seats. The zipper allows more conve-
nient access to stored objects and can
also be left open to allow the ski bag to
dry.
Please ensure that the skis are clean before
loading them into the bag. Take care to
avoid damage from sharp edges.
Securing load
After loading, secure the ski bag and its
contents. Tension the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you
fail to do so, it could endanger occu-
pants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.<
Stowing ski bag
1. To close the hatch in the luggage com-
partment:
Press the handle and slide to the left
2. Fold up the ski bag and place it in the
compartment
3. Engage the cover as shown
4. Close the cover.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving tips
This chapter is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
122
Things to remember when driving
Break-in procedures
To ensure that your vehicle continues to
furnish optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we
request that you devote careful attention
to the following information.
Engine and differential
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km:
During this initial period you should attempt
to avoid constant, steady-state operation
and vary both vehicle and engine speeds
as often as possible. Until the break-in
period has been completed you should
also refrain from exceeding the following:
> 4,500 rpm or 105 mph/170 km/h
Always obey all official speed limits.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during
these initial miles.
Once you have driven 1,200 miles/
2,000 km, the engine or vehicle speeds can
be gradually increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with
their manufacture, tires do not achieve their
full traction potential until after an initial
break-in period. Therefore, drive reservedly
during the first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve opti-
mized contact and wear patterns between
brake pads and rotors.
Following component replacements
Observe the break-in instructions again if
previously addressed components must be
replaced again during driving later.
General driving notes
Hot exhaust system
Extreme temperatures occur at the
catalytic converter on this and every
catalyst-equipped vehicle. Do not remove
the heat shields installed adjacent to vari-
ous sections of the exhaust system, and
never apply undercoating to them. When
driving, standing at idle and while parking
take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any
highly flammable materials such as hay,
leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead
to a fire, accompanied by the risk of serious
property damage as well as personal
injury.<
Air conditioning
Condensation forms in the air conditioner
system during operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed
water under the vehicle are thus normal.
Before driving into a car wash
1. Fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to
page 53, as otherwise they could be
damaged due to the width of the vehicle
2. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock, as otherwise the P position of the
automatic transmission will automati-
cally be selected when the remote con-
trol is removed. Refer to page 63
and 69.
With Comfort Access, be sure to
observe the instructions on page 63
3. Release the parking brake, especially
when you have activated Automatic
Hold. Refer to page 64 and 65.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving tips
123
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a
wedge of water can form between tires and
road surface. This phenomenon is referred
to as hydroplaning, and is characterized by
a partial or complete loss of contact
between tires and road surface, ultimately
undermining your ability to steer and brake
the vehicle.<
Driving through water
Only drive through water with a maxi-
mum depth of 1 ft/30 cm, and then
only at walking speed at the most. Other-
wise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical
systems and the transmission may be dam-
aged.<
Safe braking
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as stan-
dard equipment. The best way to brake is
to apply maximum pressure to the brake
pedal during emergency: full brake applica-
tion. Since the vehicle maintains steering
responsiveness, you can nevertheless
avoid possible obstacles with a minimum
of steering effort.
Pulsation at the brake pedal combines with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits to indi-
cate to the driver that ABS is in its active
mode.
Driving in wet conditions
While driving in wet conditions and in heavy
rain, it is a good idea to apply light pressure
to the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor
traffic conditions to ensure that this maneu-
ver does not endanger other road users.
The heat generated in this process helps
dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full
braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and reduced
efficiency of the brake system, drive
long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, even light but consistent pedal
pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake fail-
ure.<
You can further enhance the engine's brak-
ing effect by selecting a lower gear in the
automatic transmission's manual mode,
downshifting as far as first gear on
extremely steep stretches, refer to
page 70. This strategy helps you avoid
placing excessive loads on the brake sys-
tem.
Never allow the vehicle to coast with
the transmission in Neutral – or with
the engine switched off – as there is no
engine braking when the transmission is in
Neutral, and no power-assist for brakes
and steering when the engine is not run-
ning.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
accelerator and brake pedals and obstruct
their movement.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasion-
ally, during extended periods when the
vehicle is not used at all, and in operating
conditions where brake applications are
less frequent, there is an increased ten-
dency for corrosion to form on rotors, while
contaminants accumulate on the brake
pads. This occurs because the minimal
pressure which must be exerted by the
pads during brake applications to clean the
rotors is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors,
the brakes will tend to respond with a pul-
sating effect that even extended applica-
tion will fail to cure.
Mobile communications devices in
vehicle
BMW does not recommend using
mobile communications devices, e.g.
portable phones, in the interior of the vehi-
cle without a direct connection to an out-
side antenna. Otherwise the vehicle elec-
tronics and mobile communications device
can affect each other. In addition, it is not
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
124
ensured that the radiation which results
during transmission will be discharged
from the vehicle interior.<
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond
their approved carrying capacity,
never overload the vehicle. Overloading
can lead to overheating and increases the
rate at which damage develops inside the
tires. The ultimate result can assume the
form of a sudden air loss.<
Determine loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's door pillar
*
:
The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never
exceed XXX lbs. or YYY kg, as other-
wise the vehicle may be damaged and
unstable driving conditions may
result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passenger that will be riding
in your vehicle
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passenger from XXX lbs. or
YYY kg
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.:
1,400 Ibs. minus 750 Ibs. = 650 Ibs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug-
gage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight should not exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
part of the load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult the
manual for transporting a trailer to
determine how this may reduce the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permitted load is the total of the weight
of occupants and cargo/luggage. The
greater the weight of occupants, the less
cargo/luggage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as
low as possible, placing it directly
behind the bulkhead behind the rear
seats
> Cover sharp edges and corners
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat
is not occupied, secure each safety belt
in the opposite buckle.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Driving tips
125
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Securing cargo
> Use the luggage net
*
or securing straps
to hold down small and lightweight lug-
gage and cargo, refer to page 42
> Heavy-duty straps
*
for securing larger
and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Anchorages for
attaching these heavy-duty straps have
been provided in your vehicle's luggage
compartment, refer to the illustration
> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the anchorage fittings.
Always position and secure the load
beforehand as described above. If
you do not, it can even endanger the pas-
sengers during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.
Never exceed either the approved gross
vehicle weight or either of the approved
axle loads, refer to page 216, as excessive
loads can pose a safety hazard, and may
also place you in violation of freeway safety
laws.
You should never transport heavy or hard
objects unsecured in the passenger com-
partment, as they could fly around and
pose a safety hazard to the vehicle's occu-
pants during abrupt braking or evasive
maneuvers.<
Roof-mounted luggage
rack*
Anchorage points
The anchorage points are located within
the door openings.
A special rack system is available as an
option for your BMW. Please comply with
the precautions included with the installa-
tion instructions.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's cen-
ter of gravity when loaded, they have a
major effect on its handling and steering
response.
You should therefore always remember not
to exceed the approved roof weight, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle
loads when loading the rack.
You can find the specified weights in the
Technical data section on page 216.
Make sure that the load is distributed
evenly, and that it does not extend outward
to beyond the limits of the loading surface.
Always load the heaviest pieces first – on
the bottom. Be sure that adequate clear-
ance is maintained for raising the glass
roof, and that objects do not project into
the opening path of the luggage compart-
ment lid.
Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or being
lost during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen-
tly.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
126
Entry/pass tags
Infrared windshield technology has been
used on your vehicle to minimize solar
heating of the vehicle interior. This technol-
ogy also reduces the ability of electronic
devices to transmit and receive through the
windshield, which will impair their perfor-
mance and operating range.
If you want to place an electronic toll col-
lection device or entry/pass tags behind
the windshield, please use the area marked
in the illustration. This area is clearly visible
from inside the vehicle.
Standard holder*
Remove the protective cap, insert the stan-
dard and lock in place by turning 901.
At high speeds, remove the standard,
as otherwise the standard, standard
holder and vehicle can be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Navigation
This section contains various examples
that illustrate how the navigation system
provides you with reliable guidance
to your destination.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Starting navigation system
130
Starting navigation system
GPS
Enter data only when the vehicle is
stationary, and always obey the traffic
regulations and road signs in the event of
any contradiction between traffic and road
conditions and the instructions issued by
the navigation system. If you do not
observe this precaution, you may be in vio-
lation of the law, and can endanger vehicle
occupants and other road users.<
GPS stands for Global Positioning System.
This integral component within your vehi-
cle's navigation system relies on reference
satellites to determine the precise position
of your vehicle.
By allowing you to find your destination
without having to consult conventional
road maps as you drive, the navigation sys-
tem makes an important contribution to
traffic safety.
The result: the navigation system provides
you with dependable guidance to your des-
tination.
Navigation CD/DVD
Navigation CDs/DVDs are inserted in the
navigation computer located behind the left
side trim in the luggage compartment.
You can use navigation CDs as of 2001-1
and navigation DVDs in your navigation
computer.
To ensure that your vehicle's navigation
system has access to the latest highway
network information, always load the most
recent CD/DVD version of the digital road
map.
As is the case with conventional road
maps, the navigation CDs/DVDs are sub-
ject to periodic updates to ensure that they
reflect the latest information and surveys.
Navigation CDs/DVDs are available at
your BMW center.<
Changing navigation CDs/DVDs
As you drive your BMW, the computer will
alert you when you are leaving the area
stored on your current navigation CD/DVD;
you should respond by changing the navi-
gation CD/DVD in the navigation computer.
Navigation CDs contain road maps cover-
ing one or more countries or regions.
Roadmaps of Europe are stored on the
navigation DVD.
*
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
To change the navigation CD/DVD:
1. Press button.
The CD/DVD is ejected from the naviga-
tion computer
2. Remove the CD/DVD
3. Insert the new CD/DVD with the labeled
side up.
Allow approx. eight seconds for the
system to scan the data from the new
CD/DVD.
Opening navigation
Select "Navigation".
The last selected view appears on the Con-
trol Display. This display will be continually
updated as you drive.
When you park the vehicle before reaching
the entered destination, upon restarting
you will see the question "Continue route
guidance?" on the Control Display.
> When you enter "YES", the destination
guidance resumes active operation and
the last selected screen content
appears on the Control Display
> When you enter "NO" the Control Dis-
play returns to the destination entry
mode.
Overview
Press the controller to view the menu
items.
In the map display mode and during
destination guidance, all the menu
items will disappear after a few moments if
no further entries are made.<
Display in assistance
window*
You can also view the destination guidance
in the assistance window; it then remains
visible when you select a new menu.
Select and confirm your selection.
The assistance window displays the view
selected on the Control Display. This can
be:
> Map direction north
> Map in travel direction
> Map perspective
> Arrow display.
The contents of the assistance window is
continually updated as you drive.
To deactivate display:
Select again and confirm your
selection.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Destination entry
132
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select
from among the following options:
> Manual entry of destination address,
see below
> To select town/city and street from the
directory, refer to page 134
> To select destination with map, refer to
page 135
> To select destination with "Informa-
tion", refer to page 135
> To select from among recent destina-
tions, refer to page 136
> To select destination from address
book, refer to page 142.
After selecting your destination you can
proceed to start the destination guidance,
refer to page 139.
Enter data only when the vehicle is
stationary, and always obey the traffic
regulations and road signs in the event of
any contradiction between traffic and road
conditions and the instructions issued by
the navigation system. If you do not
observe this precaution, you may be in vio-
lation of the law, and can endanger vehicle
occupants and other road users.<
Manual entry of destination
address
1. Press the controller
2. Select "Dest. input" and confirm your
selection
3. Select "New dest." and confirm your
selection.
These menu items offer you various options
for entering your destination, as described
in the following section.
The system relies on a wordmatch principle
to make it easier for you to enter the names
or towns or streets. It supports various
spellings as well as automatic name com-
pletion, refer to page 138.
You can enter the address of your destina-
tion with "ABC..."
> "ROUTE GUID." is used to select the
entered address as destination and to
start destination guidance
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
> The "AS ADDRESS" command can be
used to store the entered address in the
address book.
You can store approx. 50 addresses
and then import them directly from your
address book to the navigation system
as travel destinations, refer to page 142
> "DELETE" deletes the entered address.
The following features must be borne in
mind for destination entry:
> If you do not enter a street, the system
will guide you as far as the city limits
> Depending on the data stored on your
navigation CD/DVD, you can also enter
the house or building number on some
streets
> You can skip the entry of country and
locality if the current entries are being
retained for your new destination
> You can overwrite street names if you
would like to proceed to another street
within the same locality.
The example shows how to use the naviga-
tion system to find the following destina-
tion:
United States
Beverly Hills, Ca
455 N Rexford Drive
To enter the destination address:
Select "ABC..." and confirm your selection.
Entering name
The name is not required for the destination
guidance or storage in the list, however can
simplify the assignment of addresses.
1. Select "Name" and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Turn to select the letters, then confirm
your selections by pressing.
Special characters:
Cancel selection process
Enter blank
Delete last letter
3. Select the name shown in the lower half
of the Control Display and confirm your
selection.
Selecting country of destination
When the name of a country appears in
white letters on the Control Display, this
indicates that data for more than one coun-
try is stored on the navigation CD.
To select the United States as your country
of destination:
1. Select "Country" or the country named
in the display and confirm your selec-
tion. A list of available countries
appears in the display
2. Turn until "United States" is selected
3. Press to apply your selection as your
destination entry.
Entering destination
"Town/City" or the name of the locality of
your last destination will now appear.
1. Select "Town/City" or the displayed
town name and confirm your selection
2. Turn until "B" is selected
3. Press to confirm your selection.
A directory listing localities starting with
the letter "B" appears in the lower half
of the Control Display. The list grows
smaller each time you enter a new letter
4. Enter "Beverly Hills" by selecting and
confirming the letters individually.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Destination entry
134
Special characters:
Cancel selection process
Enter blank
Delete last letter
5. Select name of locality from the direc-
tory and confirm your selection.
A town or city must be entered before
destination guidance can start.<
Entering street, house number and
intersection
"Street" or the name of the last street
entered will appear.
For instructions on entry, refer to Entering
destination.
After entering the street you can proceed
to select the house number, for instance:
"455".
1. Turn until "4" is selected
2. Press to confirm your selection.
Use the same procedure to select all
of the remaining digits in the house
number.
Special characters:
Cancel selection process
Enter blank
Delete last character
3. Select the number that appears in the
lower half of the Control Display and
confirm your selection
If the selected house number is
not stored on the navigation CD/
DVD, the system will apply the nearest
available number.
The option for entering house numbers
will not be offered if no house numbers
are stored for the selected street on
your navigation CD/DVD.<
4. Address
> "ROUTE GUID." is used to select the
entered address as destination and
to start destination guidance
> The "AS ADDRESS" command can
be used to store the entered address
in the address book.
The procedure for entering intersections is
basically the same as that used for streets.
Selecting town or city and
street from directory
If you are uncertain about the precise name
of the city or town, or the street, the direc-
tory can assist you in entering this informa-
tion. It can show you all of the stored local-
ities in a given country or of the streets
listed for any particular town or city.
The directory appears as soon as you enter
the first letter of a locality or street. You
obtain a more selective listing the more let-
ters you enter.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Map-guided destination
selection
Assume that you only know the general
location of your destination's street or
locality. You also have the option of select-
ing the destination on a map using a target
cursor and importing it into the destination
guidance.
1. Select "With map" and confirm your
selection
In the Control Display, a map sec-
tion is displayed around the first
destination from the destination list,
even if the destination guidance system
is switched off.<
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale
3. Move the controller in the desired direc-
tion to localize your destination.
If no further changes are made to the
map, after a brief pause the name of the
street or locality marked by the cursor
will appear on the screen
4. Press the controller to view other menu
items:
> closes "With map"
> "Next" changes back to "With map"
> "Location" selects the current posi-
tion as the map's focus again
> With "Save dest.", the address in the
target cursor can be applied into the
destination entry using "ROUTE
GUID." or stored in the address book
"AS ADDRESS". If the navigation
system is unable to identify a street
or town/city, your current map coor-
dinates will appear. In order to be
able to select this position as desti-
nation or to store it in the address
book as an address, a name must
first be entered, refer to "ABC...".
You can also use the destination
entry map without entering a town
or city if you wish to select a destination
and import it using the target cursor.<
Selecting destination via
"Information"
Assume that you are searching for a partic-
ular place within a town or city, such as a
hotel or restaurant, a filling station, the
nearest BMW center, tourist attractions,
ahospital.
1. Select "Information" and confirm your
selection
2. Select "On location" and confirm your
selection
3. Select the desired type of destination,
such as "Hotel / Motel" and confirm
your selection
4. A maximum of ten destinations now
appears on the right side of the Control
Display. These are listed by distance to
destination, while arrows also appear to
indicate their directions from your cur-
rent position
5. Select and confirm the destination
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Destination entry
136
6. Selecting the address transfers it to the
destination list.
> Select and confirm your
selection to move the display up or
down
> Select and confirm your selec-
tion to exit the view and return to
"ABC...".
Using the voice command system:
Looking for interesting
destinations
Are you looking for an interesting destina-
tion in a specific locality or country? You
can obtain an overview from the navigation
CD/DVD which contains listings of interest-
ing destinations in various categories.
1. Select "Information" and confirm your
selection
2. Select "On town/city" or "On country"
and confirm your selection. A screen for
entering the town/city appears on the
Control Display
3. Enter the desired town/city or country,
select "Next" and confirm your selec-
tion
4. Select your destination category, such
as "Airport" and confirm your selection.
"ABC..." appears on the Control Display
screen along with an alphabetical listing
containing all entries in the selected
destination category. You can obtain a
more selective display of the informa-
tion contained in the directory by enter-
ing one or more letters
5. Select the desired entry.
Using the voice command system:
Recent destinations
Returning to a recent destination
The system stores the last ten destinations
entered.
Select "Last dest." and confirm your selec-
tion.
A list of the stored addresses appears on
the right side of the Control Display.
Confirm the desired destination and apply
it into the destination entry with "AS
DEST.". You can also edit existing entries;
for conditions refer to "ABC...".
> "AS ADDRESS" stores the destination
address in the address book
> "DELETE" removes the destination
address.
To delete all current entries:
Select and confirm your selection.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Information location}
3. Enter the desired type of destina-
tion:
> {Hotels}
> {Parking}
> {Gas stations}.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Information destination}
3. Enter the desired type of destina-
tion:
> {Hotels}
> {Parking}
> {Gas stations}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination list
This is the most current listing of entered
destinations, with the most recent destina-
tions at the top of the list.
Once you have reached the top desti-
nation, you are moved on to the next
entry in the destination list.<
You can edit the entries in this list; start by
selecting an entry.
> Select "CHANGE" and confirm your
selection to edit the entries.
For operating instructions, refer to
"ABC...".
In this case, the entries are stored with
"AS ADDRESS" in the address book
and with "ACCEPT" applied into the
destination list
> Select "DELETE" and confirm your
selection to remove the entries
> Select and confirm your selec-
tion to move the address to the destina-
tion list. This can change the order of
the destination list.
To delete all current entries:
Select and confirm your selection.
Route selection
The navigation system also provides you
with the option of selecting a specific travel
route. You can define criteria for determin-
ing your individual route.
1. Select "Route selec." and confirm your
selection:
Various options are now listed on the
right side of the Control Display
2. Select the priorities for your travel route
and confirm your selection:
> "With highway"
Freeways and major traffic arteries
receive top priority
> "Avoid highway"
Freeways are avoided where possible
> "Fastest route"
The system determines the fastest
route; the selection criteria are dis-
tance, vehicle speed and potential
sources of traffic congestion
> "Shortest route"
Shortest distance without consideration
of the time
> "Avoid tolls"
The system avoids toll roads whenever
possible in selecting the route.
You can change the selected route as often
as you like, both when entering your desti-
nation and at any time while the system is
guiding you to it – the system revises its
travel recommendations accordingly.
The navigation system relies on spe-
cific rules to determine your route.
These vary according to the different kinds
of roads stored on the map CD/DVD.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Destination entry
138
As a result, the routes recommended by
the navigation system may not always be
the same ones that you would choose
based on personal experience.<
Using the voice command system:
Wordmatch principle
The system relies on a wordmatch principle
to make it easier for you to enter the names
or towns or streets. The system runs ongo-
ing checks, comparing your destination
entries with the data stored on the naviga-
tion CD/DVD as the basis for instant
response. The user benefits include:
> When you make an entry that consists
of more than one word, the system can
identify the name regardless of the
sequence in which you enter the indi-
vidual words.
Example:
Official version:
J.F. Kennedy Square
Possible entries:
Kennedy Square J.F.
or:
Square J.F. Kennedy
> Names of specific locations can also
vary from the official versions provided
that the spelling of the entry corre-
sponds to a standard form used in
another country
> When you are entering the names of cit-
ies and streets the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough
letters are available to ensure unambig-
uous identification.
Example:
If you want to drive to Iowa Ave NW in
Washington, the system has already
identified the street name when "o" is
entered and displayed it in the lower
half of the Control Display
> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on
the navigation CD/DVD. The system will
not accept nonexistent names and
addresses.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Route selection}
3. Enter the desired priority for your
travel route:
> {Via freeway}
> {Without freeway}
> {Fastest route}
> {Shortest route}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
Select "Route guid." and confirm your
selection.
As the navigation computer determines the
route to your destination, the distance and
the true compass direction to your destina-
tion will appear at the upper right of the
Control Display – not in all display modes.
Once the system has determined your
travel route, the city or town of destination
will appear in the upper right corner of the
display. The destination guidance is carried
out in dependence on the selected view,
refer to Displaying route.
The system also provides you with voice
instructions.
You are also guided to your destina-
tion if you select another menu, e.g.
"Entertainment" or "Climate". You are
informed of a required change in direction
by means spoken announcements in good
time prior to every intersection.<
Displaying route
The "View" menu allows you to view your
current travel route at various resolutions.
Selecting display of route map
You can also select a map showing your
travel route while the system is guiding you
to your destination.
1. Select "View" and confirm your selec-
tion. All the menu items will disappear
after a few moments if no further entries
are made
2. Select the view and confirm:
> "Map facing N."
A map facing north appears
> "Map dir. travel"
A map facing in the direction of travel
appears
> "Perspective"
A map with the planned route from a
'bird's eye' view appears
> "Arrow display"
The destination guidance is by
means of arrows on the Control Dis-
play and on the Info Display
> "Route"
The planned route appears as a list.
During destination guidance, the
route map "North" will appear auto-
matically when you enter an area that is not
completely covered by your navigation CD/
DVD.
{Route guidance on}.
{Map}.
Shows the navigation system map.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Destination guidance
140
Changing scale
Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
The map scale is provided at the lower right
of the Control Display.
Altering display direction
1. Select "View" and confirm your selec-
tion. All the menu items will disappear
after a few moments if no further entries
are made
2. Select "Map dir. travel" or "Map facing
N." and confirm your selection.
Canceling route map
To change to directional arrow mode:
1. Select "View" and confirm your selec-
tion. All the menu items will disappear
after a few moments if no further entries
are made
2. "Arrow display"
The destination guidance is by means
of arrows on the Control Display and on
the Info Display, refer to page 12.
The arrow will follow the general
course when you travel through an
area for which your navigation CD/DVD
does not provide comprehensive coverage.
This feature is intended to assist you at
crossroads and intersections.<
Displaying route list
You can access a listing of streets and
towns on your route whenever the destina-
tion guidance is active. This list is based on
the navigation system's suggested travel
route.
The distances remaining to be traveled on
each individual road are also displayed.
1. Select "View" and confirm your selec-
tion. All the menu items will disappear
after a few moments if no further entries
are made
2. Select "Route" and confirm your selec-
tion.
If the system has not yet completely
defined the travel route, "..." will appear
in the list.
Select and confirm to switch off the
route list.
The route list is displayed again after
a short time if no other menu item has
been selected.<
Selecting new route
During destination guidance you can revise
the navigation system's route recommen-
dations to avoid particular stretches of
road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers
that you want to travel before returning to
the original route.
Select "New route" and confirm your selec-
tion.
> "Avoid sect.":
The route list appears on the Control
Display. Select one or several con-
nected sections of the route that you
wish to avoid and confirm your selec-
tion.
You can correct erroneous entries by
again selecting and confirming the
stretch of the travel route to cancel its
avoid status. You can also replace the
avoid section by marking another
1. {Scale}
2. Enter the desired map scale.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
stretch.
Select and confirm; the route list
is closed and a new route is calculated
> "Avoid route":
You can also make a detour of up to
20 miles/30 km around selected sec-
tions of the calculated route. Proceed
by turning the controller to enter the
desired detour mileage, then confirm
your selection. To exit the "Avoid route"
mode without modifying your route,
enter 0 miles/0 km and confirm your
entry.
Bypassing traffic congestion
If traffic congestion is present on your pro-
jected travel route, the navigation system
will issue a "Last exit" warning just before
you reach the back-up.
To obtain an alternative route leading
around the traffic congestion:
Select and confirm your selection
or
1. Select "New route" and confirm your
selection
2. Select "Detour" and confirm your selec-
tion.
The GPS navigation system determines a
new route and then returns to the destina-
tion guidance.
The traffic information service might
not be available in some regions,
which means that a traffic congestion can-
not be displayed.<
Selecting destination
At "Information", you can select the corre-
sponding destinations. For details, refer to
'Selecting destination via Information',
page 135 and 'Looking for interesting des-
tinations', page 136.
Voice instructions
To prevent the navigation system from
interrupting other audio sources, such as a
news program or traffic bulletin, you can
deactivate the voice instructions.
Press the controller and select the desired
symbol during destination guidance:
Select and confirm your selection to
switch the voice output on or off.
Select and confirm your selection to
repeat the last direction announcement or
the last route instruction when the voice
output is switched on.
Volume adjustment
You can adjust the volume for the naviga-
tion voice instructions:
Wait until the voice instructions are issued,
then turn the button to select the desired
volume.
The navigation system's voice instructions
will continue to be issued at this volume
level, even if the other audio accessories
are set to minimum volume.
The system automatically selects your
individual volume setting each time
you unlock the vehicle using your personal
remote control.<
{Message on} or
{Message off}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Destination guidance
142
Terminating/interrupting
destination guidance
Select "Route guid." and confirm your
selection.
The system suspends destination guid-
ance, including voice instructions, until
reactivated.
Address book
To make it even easier to enter destina-
tions, the system lets you store addresses
for frequent destinations.
You have the possibility to store the
addresses in two separate address books:
> The address book of the navigation sys-
tem
> The address book of the voice com-
mand system.
Navigation system address book
Storing addresses
In this address book, you can store
approx. 50 addresses.
Addresses can be entered from different
menus.
The system stores the current address in
the address book as "AS ADDRESS".
You can also enter your current posi-
tion in the address book after leaving
the sector covered by the navigation CD/
DVD. In this case, you must enter a name.<
Selecting an address
Select "Address book" and confirm your
selection.
A list of the stored addresses appears on
the right side of the Control Display.
To select an address as destination:
1. Select address and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Select "ROUTE GUID." and confirm
your selection.
You can also edit existing entries in the
address book; for conditions refer to
"ABC...".
Home address
You can apply your home address into the
destination entry.
Select and confirm your selection.
> "ROUTE GUID." applies the current
home address as destination and desti-
nation guidance is started
> You can enter and edit the home
address using the "ABC..." function
> "LOCATION" applies the current posi-
tion as home address
> "AS ADDRESS" stores the entered
address or current position as your
home address.
Deleting addresses
Select and confirm to delete all
existing entries.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Route guidance off}.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Destination input navigation}
3. Select destination on the Control
Display.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Voice command system address
book
Storing addresses
The first destination in the destination list
can be stored in this address book:
It is always the case that only the first entry
in the destination list can be saved. To save
other addresses, change the destination
list accordingly, refer to page 137.
The house number is not stored in the
address book of the voice command
system.<
Selecting an address
Home address
Deleting addresses
To delete individual entries:
To delete all current entries:
Current position
Display of current position
Select "Location" and confirm your selec-
tion.
You can request the current location of
your BMW or view a display showing your
map position. If the navigation system is
unable to identify a town or city, your cur-
rent map coordinates will appear.
If the navigation system recognizes the
city, but not the street and intersection, you
can enter these manually, refer to "ABC..."
for operating instructions. The entry is
applied as the current position with
"ACCEPT".
"AS ADDRESS" can be used to import your
current position into the address book; you
can also enter a name as desired. Entry of a
name is mandatory for locations identified
only by their map coordinates.
"DELETE" deletes the entry from the
address book.
Entering current position
We recommend that you avoid entering
subsequent corrections of your position
unless absolutely necessary. After trans-
port by truck or rail, etc., the GPS receiver
may require several minutes to determine
your current position. You can reduce the
amount of time the system requires to
1. {Navigation}
2. {Save destination}
3. Enter a name to be assigned to the
destination's map coordinates.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Destination input with address}
3. {Select destination}
4. Enter destination
or
1. {Navigation}
2. {Read out address book}
> To scroll forward: {Next}
> To scroll back: {Back}
> To repeat: {Repeat}
> To import to destination list:
{Select}.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Route guidance to home}.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Delete}
3. Select name.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Delete address book}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Destination guidance
144
determine your current position by entering
it manually.
To enter your current position:
1. Select "Location" and confirm your
selection
2. The procedure for entering your current
position is the same as that used to
enter your destination, refer to
page 132.
Once effective GPS reception has
been established, it will no longer be
possible to revise your position manually.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
What to do if …
What to do if …
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise
display?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position
owing to obstructions, your position is
not yet available on your navigation CD/
DVD, or the system is in the process of
calculating your position. Please wait
and then try again later on
> the GPS logo disappears from the Con-
trol Display screen?
Reception is interrupted; a building or
similar obstruction may be the cause
> the destination guidance refuses to
import an address from the destination
directory as its destination?
The address is not stored on the navi-
gation CD/DVD currently in use.
Choose an address as close as possi-
ble to the original one, using the desti-
nation entry map as required
> the destination guidance does not
apply an address without the street?
No specified center is defined for the
selected locality on your navigation CD/
DVD. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station, etc., then
start the destination guidance
> you want to enter an address for the
destination guidance, but it is not pos-
sible to select the letters for your
desired entry?
The address is not stored on the navi-
gation CD/DVD currently in use. In this
case, the system will not offer you any
letters to choose from. Choose an
address as close as possible to the
original one, using the destination entry
map as required
> the system stops furnishing directions
on which way to turn as you approach
intersections?
You are driving in an area that has not
yet been completely recorded on the
navigation CD/DVD. Instead of the turn-
off arrow, an arrow appears that follows
the course of the planned route,
or
you have left the proposed route and
the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new route proposal
> during destination guidance the desti-
nation route map is automatically dis-
played?
You are driving in an area that has not
yet been recorded on the navigation
CD/DVD. The destination guidance
cannot operate under these conditions.
However, you will see the current posi-
tion of your BMW in the map display to
help you orient yourself
> the battery has been disconnected?
It will take approx. 15 minutes for the
system to resume operation.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Entertainment
This chapter is intended to assist you in
deriving maximum viewing and listening
pleasure from radio and TV broadcasts,
CDs or DVDs.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
On/off, tone
148
On/off, tone
Controls
Operation using buttons
The illustration shows a CD player as an
example.
1 Operating audio and video sources
> Press: switching on/off
> Turn: adjusting volume
2 CD slot
3 Eject CD
4 Change station/track
> Change the station
> Fast forward/reverse
> Music track change for CD, change
chapter for DVD changer
> Change program for TV
Operation using Control Center
The following control options are available
in the "Entertainment" menu.
> "FM..." and "AM..."
Select waveband
> "WB"
Select Weather Band
If your vehicle is equipped with satellite
radio, "SAT...", select satellite radio, is
located at this position
> "CD" and
Change audio source
> "Tone"
Set tone, e.g. treble, bass
> "Video" and "Audio"
Change to video or audio sources
> "TV" and "DVD"
Change video source
> "Picture"
Adjust picture
Select standard
Select picture format
> "Tone"
Set tone, e.g. treble, bass.
You can also control the radio, CD player,
CD changer and the TV using the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 16, as
well as via the voice command system,
refer to page 26.
Operating temperatures
The system is configured for operat-
ing temperatures of 57/–156 to
1407/+606. Outside this temperature
range, malfunctions can occur.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Care instructions
You can find everything you need to know
on this topic by consulting the separate
Caring for your vehicle brochure.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The system returns to the most recently
selected audio or video source, radio, CD,
DVD or TV.
Using with ignition off
Switching the ignition off simultaneously
deactivates the sound system.
To switch on again: press the button.
The audio and video functions remain avail-
able for use for a period of approx.
20 minutes after you switch off the ignition.
Volume adjustment
Adjusting volume
Turn the button to the desired volume level.
The sound system automatically
reverts to its mute mode automati-
cally whenever you use your portable
phone.<
The system automatically selects your
individual volume setting each time
you unlock the vehicle using your personal
remote control.<
Tone control
Playing audio recordings
You can choose from the following tone
settings:
> Treble:
To amplify or reduce high frequencies
> Bass:
To amplify or reduce low frequencies
> Right/left volume balance, balance:
Left or right, high/low volume
> Front-to-rear volume balance, fader:
Front or rear, high/low volume
> Default settings, RESET:
This feature resets the tone settings to
their standard default settings
> Speed-dependent volume adjustment,
Speed Volume
> Spatial sound effect Professional
LOGIC7
*
> Equalizer
*
.
The speakers and headphones can
be adjusted separately. The tone set-
tings of the headphones are made in the
rear screen with the headphones con-
nected. Only treble, bass and balance can
be adjusted.<
The system automatically selects your
individual tone setting each time you
unlock the vehicle using your personal
remote control.<
{Radio} or {Audio off}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
On/off, tone
150
Tone adjustment
1. Select "Tone" and confirm your selec-
tion
For the tone settings of the TV or
DVD, you can directly select "Tone"
for the video sources and confirm your
selection.<
2. Select desired tone settings
> "Treble" and "Bass"
Select "Treble" or "Bass". Press and
turn the controller to make the adjust-
ment
> "Balance" and "Fader"
Select "Balance" or "Fader". Press and
turn the controller to make the adjust-
ment
> "Speed Vol."
Raises volume as vehicle speed
increases. By pressing and turning
the controller, you can adjust the val-
ues between 1– 6
> "LOGIC7"
*
Select "LOGIC7". Press and turn the
controller to make the adjustment.
You can set the spatial sound effect
between the values 0 and 10. The best
possible spatial sound lies at the
values 5 and 6. The best possible spa-
tial sound lies at the values 5 and 6.
At 0, the spatial sound effect is
switched off. This setting is suitable for
radio plays, for example.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are
registered trade marks of Lexicon,
Inc., a company of the Harman Interna-
tional Group.<
> Equalizer
*
Select and confirm your selec-
tion.
Turn the controller to select the desired
frequency range. Repeated pressing
and turning of the controller makes the
adjustment.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings except
"Speed Vol." to the standard default set-
tings.
Select "RESET" and confirm your selection.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Radio
152
Radio
Listening to radio
1. Switch on audio or video sources, refer
to page 149.
Select " Audio" and confirm your
selection if a video source is switched
on
2. If another audio source is switched on,
select "FM..." or "AM..." and confirm
your selection.
Volume adjustment, refer to page 149.
Tone control, refer to page 149.
Waveband selection
Your radio provides reception the FM and
AM wavebands.
To select waveband:
Select "FM..." or "AM..." and confirm your
selection.
Each time you confirm "AM..." the system
alternately switches between the AM wave-
band and the "Autostore" mode.
Each time you confirm "FM...", the system
alternately switches between "Memorized
Stations" and the "Autostore" mode
Information display
The current waveband selection appears
on the Control Display, for instance, in the
FM waveband:
> Memorized Stations
FM Waveband
> 03
Number of memory location along with
broadcast frequency.
The frequency of the current station can be
seen in the lower status line of the Control
Display, refer to page 23.
Station selection
You can search for a particular station by
selecting its frequency.
Using Control Center
1. Select "FM..." or "AM..." and confirm
your selection.
Each time you confirm "AM..." the sys-
tem alternately switches between the
AM waveband and the "Autostore"
mode.
Each time you confirm "FM...", the sys-
tem alternately switches between
"Memorized Stations" and the
"Autostore" mode
{Radio}.
{FM} or {AM}.
1. {Radio}
2. {Frequency 88 ..106 (Point 1 ..9)}.
{FM} or {AM}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
2. Select "MANUAL" and confirm your
selection.
Manual search
1. Select the frequency display and con-
firm your selection
2. Turn the controller to set the frequency
manually
3. Press the controller to confirm your
entry.
Next station
Select the desired direction and con-
firm your selection.
The scan mode begins with the currently
selected frequency.
The scan mode is stopped as soon as a
station is found.
The frequency is shown on the Control Dis-
play.
The system switches to the next station.
Listening to sample and selecting,
Scan
The automatic scan search feature auto-
matically plays a brief sample from each
station in the selected waveband.
1. Select "SCAN" and confirm your selec-
tion.
Station search starts
2. To select a station, confirm "SCAN" a
second time.
This cancels the scan function, and the
radio remains on the current station.
Buttons in center console
Scanning
Extended pressure.
The scan mode begins with the currently
selected frequency.
The scan mode is stopped as soon as a
station is found.
The frequency of the station appears in the
bottom status line, refer to page 23.
Next station
Press to select the desired direction.
The system switches to the next station.
Storing and retrieving
a station
Memory locations
Your radio can store 36 stations:
> You can store as many as 18 stations in
the FM waveband
> You can store up to 18 stations in the
AM waveband.
Each time you confirm "AM..." the
system alternately switches between
the AM waveband and the "Autostore"
mode.
Each time you confirm "FM...", the system
alternately switches between "Memorized
Stations" and the "Autostore" mode.<
1. {Radio}
2. {Next station} or {Station back}.
1. {Radio}
2. {Next station} or {Station back}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Radio
154
Storing a station
1. Select "FM..." or "AM..." and confirm
your selection.
Each time you confirm "AM..." the sys-
tem alternately switches between the
AM waveband and the "Autostore"
mode.
Each time you confirm "FM...", the sys-
tem alternately switches between
"Memorized Stations" and the
"Autostore" mode
2. Select "MANUAL" and confirm your
selection
3. Selecting a station, refer to page 152.
The autostore utility's "AUTOSTORE"
feature automatically selects and stores
the stations providing the best recep-
tion in the AM and FM wavebands
4. Select "MEMORIZE" and confirm your
selection. For a manual search, refer to
page 153, "MEMORIZE" is selected
automatically
5. Turn the controller and select the mem-
ory location
6. Maintain pressure on the controller for
several seconds.
The station is now stored.
Selecting a stored channel
1. Select "FM..." or "AM..." and confirm
your selection.
Each time you confirm "AM..." the sys-
tem alternately switches between the
AM waveband and the "Autostore"
mode.
Each time you confirm "FM...", the sys-
tem alternately switches between
"Memorized Stations" and the
"Autostore" mode
2. Turn and press the controller to select
stored stations.
{FM} or {AM}.
{FM} or {AM}.
1. {Radio}
2. {Station 1 ..12}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Weather Band
Weather Radio is a service of the National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration,
NOAA, of the U.S. Department of Com-
merce. Weather messages are repeated
every four to six minutes and are routinely
revised every one to three hours, or more
frequently if needed. Most of the stations
operate 24 hours daily. During severe
weather, National Weather Service fore-
casters can interrupt the routine weather
broadcasts and substitute special warning
messages. If you have a question concern-
ing NOAA Weather Radio, please contact
your nearest National Weather Service
Office, or write to National Weather Ser-
vice, Attn: W/OM11, National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration, 1325 East-
West Highway Silver Spring, MD. 20910.
Selecting Weather Band
1. Select "WB" and confirm your selection
2. Select channels and confirm your
selection.
With satellite radio:
1. Select "AM" and confirm your selection
2. Each time you confirm "AM", the sys-
tem alternately switches between the
"AM" and "Weather" mode
3. Select channels and confirm your
selection.
In some regions, only one or two
channels can be received or Weather
Band channels are unavailable.<
Satellite radio*
You can receive approx. 100 different
channels with high sound quality.
You can listen to one of these channels free
of charge at any time to obtain a first
impression. The channel is marked
with .
To listen to additional channels of your
choice, you must have these channels
enabled.
You may experience signal drops and
muting events related to this new
technology.<
Enabling channels
1. Select "SAT" and confirm your selec-
tion.
The channels that can be received are
shown in the list
2. Select a channel and confirm your
selection
3. Dial the displayed telephone number
to have the system enabled.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Radio
156
During enabling, leave the ignition
switched on.
Channel selection
1. Select "SAT" and confirm your selec-
tion.
Each time you confirm "SAT", the sys-
tem alternately changes between
"Channels", "Category" and the "Pre-
sets".
The enabled channels are displayed
with
2. Select a channel and confirm your
selection
Additional information
3. Confirm channel once again.
The name of the artiste, the title of the
track and the name of the album are
displayed.
Notes
As a rule, reception is guaranteed under a
clear sky. If you are unable to receive any
channel, the message "ACQUIRING..."
appears in the status line. "Display ESN"
shows the electronic serial number on the
Control Display. The following also appear:
> "Call Sirius ( ) to Subscribe", or
> "Call Sirius ( ) to Activate"
to subscribe or activate the selected chan-
nel.
When there is a signal blockage or the
transmission is suspended momentarily for
more than 4 seconds.
Service may be interrupted or unavail-
able for specific reasons such as
environmental or topographic conditions
and other factors that satellite radio cannot
directly control. The signal might not be
available in tunnels, in parking garages,
next to tall buildings, near trees with dense
foliage, near mountains or other possible
strong sources of radio interference.
Service should resume normally after the
source of signal unavailability has been
cleared.<
Selecting a category
1. Select "SAT" and keep pressing until
"Category" appears.
The categories are shown in the cate-
gory list
2. Select a category, e.g. "POP", and con-
firm your selection.
All the channels available in the cate-
gory "POP" are displayed
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
3. Storing channels and selecting memory
locations, refer to next section. Addi-
tional information, refer to page 156.
Storing a channel
1. Select "SAT" and confirm your selection
2. Select the desired channel
3. Select "STORE" and confirm your
selection. After confirming, you are in
the 'preset list'
4. Turn the controller and select a memory
location where the channel is to be
stored and press the controller for sev-
eral seconds.
Selecting a stored channel
Turn the controller to select and confirm
stored channels in the preset list.
Up to twelve stations on which you have
previously stored the channels can be
selected.
Next station
Press to select the desired direction.
The next channel that appears on the Con-
trol Display is selected.
1. {Radio}
2. {Station 1 ..12}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
CD Compact Disc
158
CD Compact Disc
Listening to CDs
Insert the CD in the slot.
If a CD is already inserted in the CD player:
Start playback.
Select "CD" and confirm your selection.
Volume adjustment, refer to page 149.
Tone control, refer to page 149.
Selecting a track using
Control Center
Selecting music track
Select music track and confirm your selec-
tion.
Listening to sample and selecting,
Scan
The system plays a brief sample from each
CD track.
1. To start sampling:
Select "SCAN" and confirm your selec-
tion
2. To select a track:
Confirm "SCAN" a second time to can-
cel the scan function. Play resumes at
the point on the CD at which sampling
was interrupted.
Random play sequence
The music tracks on the CD are played in a
random sequence, Random.
To start random play:
Select "RND" and confirm your selection.
To cancel random play:
Select any other function except track
search.
It is possible to hear the same song
more than once.<
Selecting a track using
buttons
Track search
Select the direction.
Press repeatedly, continuing until you
reach the desired track.
The CD will start play at the track selected.
*
1. {CD}
2. {CD on}.
1. {CD}
2. {Track 1 ..30}.
1. {CD}
2. {Next} or {Back}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Fast forward/reverse
1. Select the direction.
Press and hold the button. The tracks
can be heard, but the sound is distorted
2. To interrupt the fast forward/reverse
function, release the button.
The CD will start play at the point
selected.
Malfunctions
The CD player is a 'Class 1' laser
product. Never remove the cover from
the housing. Do not operate the unit if the
cover is damaged. Operation without the
cover can lead to serious eye injury from
invisible laser beams.
Always refer all repair and maintenance
operations to qualified technicians.
With self-recorded CDs, labels applied
later can become detached during play-
back due to the development of heat, caus-
ing irreparable damage to the device.<
To prevent CDs from being copied
illegally, they are often provided with
copy protection by the manufacturer.
Under certain circumstances this can pre-
vent or restrict the playing of CDs on your
CD player. In this case please contact the
CD dealer or manufacturer.<
If you play self-recorded audio CDs, faults,
e.g. drop-outs, can occur, or the CD is not
played at all.
High levels of humidity inside the
player can condense on the laser's
scan lens and prevent it from reading the
CD.
Only use round CDs with a standard diam-
eter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs
with an adapter, e.g. maxi CDs, as other-
wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and
may no longer be ejected.
Do not use combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD+,
as otherwise the CD/DVD can jam, prevent-
ing it from being ejected.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
CD changer
160
CD changer
Location
The BMW CD changer with a storage
capacity of 6 CDs is installed above the
glove compartment.
Removing CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the storage
magazine you must first remove it from the
CD changer:
1. Press button 1; the lid 2 opens
2. The CD magazine is ejected and can be
removed.
Inserting/removing CDs from
CD magazine
When inserting or removing CDs always
remember to grasp them on the edge, tak-
ing care to avoid touching the data side
with its mirror finish.
> To insert:
Insert the CD in its slot with the label
side on top
> To remove:
Pull out the desired drawer and remove
the corresponding CD, as shown in the
illustration.
Inserting CD magazine
1. Press button 1; the lid opens
2. Ensure that the arrow symbol is point-
ing toward the CD player and slide the
magazine 2 all the way in. The lid closes
automatically.
The CD changer automatically reads
in the loaded CDs and is then ready
for operation.<
Listening to CDs
1. Insert the CD magazine
2. Select and confirm your selec-
tion.
After a few seconds, play will resume at the
point where the DVD stopped earlier.
*
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
If the CD magazine has been newly filled,
playback begins with the lowest CD, e.g.
CD 1, track 1.
Volume adjustment, refer to page 149.
Tone control, refer to page 149.
If you play self-recorded audio CDs,
faults, e.g. drop-outs, can occur, or
the CD is not played at all.<
Status displays
The CD magazine's load status is indicated
on the Control Display.
If the display fails to detect a CD that
you have loaded in the magazine,
check to ensure that the CD has been
inserted correctly and inspect it for signs of
defects.<
Selecting a track using
Control Center
Selecting a CD
Select CD and confirm your selection.
Playback starts on the first track. At the
end of the last track, the next CD will be
selected.
Listening to sample and selecting,
Scan
The system automatically plays a brief
sample from each of the tracks on the cur-
rent CD.
1. To start sampling:
Select "SCAN" and confirm your selec-
tion.
The Scan function starts with the next
track. Once all tracks have been played
once, the next track is played
2. To select a track:
Confirm "SCAN" a second time to can-
cel the scan function. Play resumes at
the point on the CD at which sampling
was interrupted.
Random play sequence
In this mode the music tracks on the cur-
rent CD are played in a random sequence,
Random.
To start random play:
Select "RND" and confirm your selection.
To cancel random play:
Select any other function except track
search.
Selecting a track using
buttons
Track search
Select the direction.
Press repeatedly, continuing until you
reach the desired track on the current CD.
The CD will start play at the track selected.
1. {CD changer}
2. {CD on}.
{CD 1 ..6}.
1. {CD changer}
2. {Next} or {Back}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
CD changer
162
Fast forward/reverse
1. Select the direction.
Press and hold the button. The tracks
can be heard, but the sound is distorted
2. To interrupt the fast forward/reverse
function, release the button.
The system will continue play at the
point on the CD at which the button was
released.
Selecting music track
Malfunctions
The BMW CD changer is a 'Class 1'
laser product. Never remove the
cover from the housing. Do not operate the
unit if the cover is damaged. Operation
without the cover can lead to serious eye
injury from invisible laser beams.
Always refer all repair and maintenance
operations to qualified technicians.
With self-recorded CDs, labels applied
later can become detached during play-
back due to the development of heat, caus-
ing irreparable damage to the device.<
To prevent CDs from being copied
illegally, they are often provided with
copy protection by the manufacturer.
Under certain circumstances, this can pre-
vent or restrict the playing of CDs on your
CD changer. In this case please contact the
CD dealer or manufacturer.<
If you play self-recorded audio CDs, faults,
e.g. drop-outs, can occur, or the CD is not
played at all.
High levels of humidity inside the
player can condense on the laser's
scan lens and temporarily prevent it from
reading the CD.
Do not use combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD+,
as otherwise the CD/DVD can jam, prevent-
ing it from being ejected.<
1. {CD changer}
2. {Track 1 ..30}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
TV
For your own safety, the TV picture is only
shown on the rear screen.
The system is designed for reception
of analog television. Due to the quality
of mobile reception, reduced picture qual-
ity can result depending on the current
position and network coverage in spite of
the highly advanced reception technology
used. A change in vehicle locations can
result in improved reception quality in many
cases.<
Television
1. Switch on audio or video sources, refer
to page 149.
Select " Video" and confirm your
selection if an audio source is switched
on
2. Select "TV" and confirm your selection.
The device selects the last program set.
Volume adjustment, refer to page 149.
Tone control, refer to page 149.
All menu items will disappear from the
screen after a brief pause if you do not
make any additional entries.<
Storing programs
The programs with the strongest reception
are automatically stored and continuously
adjusted to the respective reception situa-
tion.
Selecting programs
Using Control Center
1. Press the controller to view the pro-
grams
2. Select program and confirm your selec-
tion.
Button in rear
Press the button in the desired direction
the number of times required to reach the
program you want.
*
{TV on}.
1. {TV}
2. {Next} or {Back}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
TV
164
Adjusting picture*
During reception, the menu items are
displayed by pressing the controller.<
1. Select "TV" and confirm your selection
2. Select "Picture" and confirm your selec-
tion.
Additional menu items are displayed on
the right side.
Selecting brightness, color, contrast
and tint
Select "Brightness", "Color", "Contrast" or
"Tint". Press and turn the controller to make
the adjustment.
Selecting standard
Television programs can be received
worldwide with the multi-standard receiver
for PAL, SECAM, NTSC.
The TV standard used is not the same in all
countries. However, you can change over
your TV receiver to all common TV stan-
dards.
During reception, the menu items are
displayed by pressing the controller.<
1. Select "TV" and confirm your selection
2. Select "Picture" and confirm your selec-
tion
3. Select "TV format" and confirm your
selection
4. Select the country you are currently in
from the list displayed and confirm your
selection.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
DVD changer
Location
The BMW DVD changer for 6 DVDs or
audio CDs is mounted behind the left side
trim panel in the luggage compartment.
Removing DVD magazine
To insert or remove DVDs or CDs from the
storage magazine, you must first remove it
from the DVD changer:
1. Push the door to the right, refer to
arrow 1
2. Press the button, refer to arrow 2.
The magazine is ejected and can be
removed.
Inserting/removing CDs/DVDs from
DVD magazine
When inserting or removing DVDs/CDs,
always remember to grasp them on the
edge, taking care to avoid touching the
data side with its mirror finish.
> To insert:
Insert the DVD or CD in its slot with the
label side on top
> To remove:
Pull out the desired drawer and remove
the corresponding DVD or CD, as
shown in the illustration.
Dual-sided DVDs available from retail
suppliers are coated on both sides
and bear no markings. This means both
sides are information carriers. To play back
the information on the other side, remove
the magazine and turn over the DVD.
If you play self-recorded audio CD-Rs,
faults, e.g. drop-outs, can occur.<
Inserting DVD magazine
1. Push the door to the right
2. Ensure that the arrow symbol is point-
ing toward the DVD changer and slide
the magazine all the way in
*
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
DVD changer
166
3. Close the door again.
The DVD changer checks the maga-
zine for inserted DVDs or CDs and is
then ready for operation.<
DVD country codes
Your DVD changer only plays DVDs with
the coding 0 or 1. This coding cannot be
changed.
Playing DVDs
Make all entries with the vehicle sta-
tionary. If you do not observe this pre-
caution, you may endanger vehicle occu-
pants and other road users.<
1. Insert the DVD magazine
2. Select "DVD" and confirm your selec-
tion.
After a few seconds, play will resume at the
point where the DVD stopped earlier.
If the DVD magazine has been newly
filled or an audio CD played from the
DVD magazine, playback begins with the
lowest DVD in the DVD magazine.
Volume adjustment, refer to page 149.
Tone control, refer to page 149.
Status displays
The DVD magazine's load status is indi-
cated on the Control Display.
If the display fails to detect a DVD that
you have loaded in the magazine,
check to ensure that the DVD has been
inserted correctly and inspect it for signs of
defects.
If there are audio CDs in the DVD maga-
zine, these will not be displayed in the DVD
menu, but instead in the CD changer menu.
If your vehicle is equipped with an addi-
tional CD changer, they will be displayed
with the numbers 7 to 12.<
DVD control
With the DVD controller you can select the
track and chapter, display the DVD-specific
menu and operate functions such as Lan-
guage, Fast Forward and Reverse or Freez-
ing Frame.
A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of
the DVD control, under certain circum-
stances while the entire DVD is being
played. You are then unable to operate the
DVD control. In this case, attempt to make
the selection using the DVD-specific menu.
Display DVD controller:
1. Select "DVD" and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Wait briefly until all menu items have
disappeared, then press controller.
{DVD on}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
The DVD controller disappears again after a
short time if you have not selected a func-
tion.
During playback the DVD controller is
displayed by pressing the controller.<
Selecting a track
Several tracks can be stored on a DVD.
1. Select DVD and confirm your selection.
Playback begins after a few seconds
2. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 166
3. Select "FULL MENU" and confirm your
selection
4. Select "TITLE" and confirm your selec-
tion
5. Turn and press the controller to select
the desired track.
Playback begins at the track selected.
Fast forward/reverse
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 166
2. Select the direction
and confirm your selection
3. To increase the fast forward/reverse
speed, press the controller several
times.
The DVD playback will be distorted
4. End fast forward/reverse:
Select and confirm your selec-
tion.
The DVD will start play at the point
selected.
When the DVD is playing, rapid fast
forward/reverse is started by turning
the controller. The speed can be increased
by turning the controller further. To inter-
rupt the fast forward/reverse function,
release the controller. The system will con-
tinue play at the point on the DVD at which
the controller was released.<
Softkey Function
Start playback
Stop playback
Close DVD controller
Activate and deactivate
freezing frame
Searching for chapter
Fast forward/reverse
DVD-specific menu:
Select functions
DVD-specific menu:
Return to previous menu
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
DVD changer
168
Searching for chapter
You can change to the next or previ-
ous chapter during playback.<
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 166
2. Select the direction
and confirm repeatedly, continuing until
you reach the desired chapter
or with buttons
select the direction.
Press repeatedly, continuing until you
reach the desired chapter on the current
DVD.
Playback begins at the chapter selected.
Adjusting picture
1. During playback, press controller
2. Select and confirm your selection
3. Adjusting the picture, refer to page 164.
Freezing frame
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 166
2. At the desired point:
Select and confirm your selec-
tion.
The film is stopped
3. To restart the DVD:
Select or and confirm your
selection.
DVD playback is continued at the point
at which it was interrupted.
Selecting picture format
You can adjust the DVD format to your
screen.
The picture format is a DVD-specific func-
tion and is not offered by all DVDs.
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 166
2. Select and confirm your selection
3. Select and confirm your selection
4. Select "Picture" and confirm your selec-
tion
5. Select "Pict. format" and confirm your
selection
6. Select the desired picture format and
confirm your selection.
Selecting language,
subtitles and viewing angle
Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in
various languages or scene descriptions
for the hearing impaired. In addition, with
some DVDs the film can be viewed from dif-
ferent camera angles. These functions are
stored on the DVD.
To select functions:
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 166
2. Select "FULL MENU" and confirm your
selection.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
> Select "AUDIO" and confirm your
selection.
You can select from the various lan-
guages by turning and pressing the
controller
> Select "SUBTITLE" and confirm your
selection.
You can display the subtitles in the lan-
guage of your choice by turning and
pressing the controller
> Select "ANGLE" and confirm your
selection.
You can change the camera angle by
turning and pressing the controller.
Notes or symbols that appear during
the playback of a film generally point
out different camera angles. These are
usually only briefly available.
With some DVDs the language, sub-
titles or camera angle is only possible
with the DVD-specific menu.
Refer to the information on your DVD for
possible selections.<
Opening DVD-specific
menu
Additional functions may be available on
DVDs. For example, the viewer can select
from several possible plots or display infor-
mation on the film.
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 166
2. Select "MENU" or "TOP" and confirm
your selection.
With "MENU" you can generally
open the DVD-specific main
menu. On some DVDs you will find an
additional menu called "TOP" in which,
for example, you can select music
scenes.<
To make a selection:
1. to select a function
2. "OK" to confirm selection.
To return to a previous menu:
Select or and confirm your
selection.
Language, subtitle or angle can also
be selected in the DVD-specific
menu.
Refer to the information on your DVD for
possible selections.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
DVD changer
170
Malfunctions/notes
The BMW DVD changer is a 'Class 1'
laser product. Never remove the
cover from the housing. Do not operate the
unit if the cover is damaged. Operation
without the cover can lead to serious eye
injury from invisible laser beams.
Always refer all repair and maintenance
operations to qualified technicians.
With self-recorded CDs or DVDs, labels
applied later can become detached during
playback due to the development of heat,
causing irreparable damage to the
device.<
Macrovision copy protection:
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights
owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovi-
sion Corporation, and is intended for home
and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Cor-
poration. Reverse engineering or disas-
sembly is prohibited.<
To prevent CDs from being copied
illegally, they are often provided with
copy protection by the manufacturer.
Under certain circumstances this can pre-
vent or restrict the playing of CDs on the
DVD changer. In this case please contact
the CD dealer or manufacturer.<
If you play self-recorded audio CDs, faults,
e.g. drop-outs, can occur, or the CD is not
played at all.
The DVD changer can play the following
formats:
> Video DVD
> CD-DA, Audio CD
> CD-R.
The DVD Audio format is not sup-
ported by the DVD changer. However,
many audio DVDs available in stores also
contain a video track in the DVD Video for-
mat in addition to the audio track. These
DVDs can be played back by the DVD
changer. Please refer to the information on
your DVD to determine whether your audio
DVD contains an additional video track.
DVDs are usually divided into tracks and
chapters and can contain different subti-
tles, camera angles or sound tracks, lan-
guages and sound formats. Depending on
the version of the DVD, these functions can
be selected either directly with the DVD
control system or only via the DVD-specific
menu. Refer to the information on your DVD
for possible selections.
High levels of humidity inside the player
can condense on the laser's scan lens and
prevent it from reading the DVD.
Do not use combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD+,
as otherwise the CD/DVD can jam, prevent-
ing it from being ejected.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter describes the extensive
array of options available for mobile
communications with family, friends,
business associates and
service providers.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Using the phone in your vehicle
174
Using the phone in your vehicle
Safety notice
A car phone can provide many services, in
an emergency even initiating a lifesaving
rescue. However, bear the following in
mind:
Adjustments
To avoid posing an unnecessary haz-
ard due to inattention, both to your
own vehicle's occupants and to other road
users: never attempt to use the controls or
make entries unless traffic and road condi-
tions allow.<
Using the phone in your vehicle
Using a portable phone to make and
receive calls while driving is now ille-
gal in virtually every country in the world.
Always use your hands-free system, or
stop your vehicle in an area where you will
not pose a safety hazard to other road
users and switch the engine off.<
Antenna
When using the phone, ensure that all
persons in the area are at least 20 in/
50 cm from the antenna. Never use your
BMW portable phone if the antenna is dam-
aged. Contact between your skin and a
damaged antenna can result in minor
burns.
If the antenna is damaged, have it replaced
immediately.<
Special environmental conditions
Do not use your phone within a
garage, or near an open hood. The air
in these areas could contain fuel vapors,
and the portable phone might generate
sparks that could result in burns.
This same precaution applies to opening
luggage compartment lids on vehicles
equipped for operation using natural gas or
hydrogen, and to all vehicles with luggage
compartment-mounted batteries.
Always switch off your BMW portable
phone in areas where blasting work is
being conducted with explosives. The
phone signals could potentially act as a
high-frequency transmitter and set off
explosions.
Always switch off your BMW portable
phone in areas where an increased explo-
sion danger is present. This category
includes filling stations along with fuel and
chemical storage depots, etc., and all areas
in which the air can contain fuel, chemicals
or metal particles. Under these conditions,
your BMW portable phone could conceiv-
ably generate sparks that could lead to a
fire or explosion. Always observe all legal
regulations governing the use of portable
phones in the vicinity of filling stations,
chemical factories and other areas where
an explosion potential exists.
Never use the BMW portable phone in hos-
pitals, care centers or at other locations
where medical equipment may be in oper-
ation, such as accident sites, etc.
Your wireless service provider can furnish
you with more detailed information on legal
regulations governing the use of your
phone.<
Medical equipment
Portable phones can generate inter-
ference capable of preventing hearing
aids and cardiac pacemakers from operat-
ing correctly. If you or any occupant of the
vehicle use such equipment, consult a phy-
sician or the manufacturer of the equip-
ment to determine whether it is adequately
shielded against high-frequency energy.
Persons with cardiac pacemakers should
bear the following in mind:
Always hold the switched-on BMW porta-
ble phone more than 6 in/15 cm away from
the cardiac pacemaker.
Do not carry the BMW portable phone in
your breast pocket.
Use the ear on the opposite side of the car-
diac pacemaker to reduce the likelihood of
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
175
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
influencing the cardiac pacemaker.
With the slightest sign of a cardiac pace-
maker malfunction, switch the BMW porta-
ble phone off immediately.<
Batteries
To avoid possible short circuits, after
removing a battery you should never
allow it to come into contact with metallic
surfaces of any kind. This is why you should
handle charged batteries with care, in par-
ticular if you place batteries, e.g. in jacket
or shirt pockets that contain metal objects.
If you are in an environment where there is
a risk of explosion, do not remove the bat-
tery from the device, as otherwise sparks
from your battery could cause explosions
or fire.<
Disposing of used batteries
Return used batteries to a recycling
collection point or to your BMW cen-
ter.<
Care instructions
You can find useful information on caring
for your portable phone in the Caring for
your vehicle brochure and in the separate
portable phone Owner's Manual.
Controls
To be able to use the BMW portable phone
via the vehicle equipment, it must be
located in the cradle, refer to page 178.
For information on operating your
portable phone, please consult the
separate Owner's Manual.<
The BMW portable phone can be operated
by means of:
> The steering wheel, refer to page 16
> The Control Center.
> The folding telephone keypad
> The voice command system, except for
incoming calls.
Control Center
You can use the following functions in the
Control Center:
> The phone book
> The TOP 8 list
> The redial list.
After selecting the desired entry, a connec-
tion can be set up via:
> The button on the steering wheel
> The folding telephone keypad
> The Control Center.
Here, the dialed number appears in the
upper status line, refer to page 23.
Missed calls are also shown in a list if this
service is supported by your wireless ser-
vice provider.
Select and and confirm your
selection to switch between the two pages
of the "Communication" menu.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Using the phone in your vehicle
176
Telephone keypad, folding
The telephone keypad allows you to use all
of the basic BMW portable phone functions
without ever picking up the handset.
Calls are automatically routed through the
hands-free system.
The telephone keypad is available for
operation at the radio mode in the
ignition lock, refer to page 62.<
1 Briefly press the telephone keypad,
it will extend automatically
When you are done using the tele-
phone keypad, press it back in, con-
tinuing until the detent engages
It is not possible to remove the
telephone keypad.<
2 Press briefly: terminate call
Press longer: switch BMW
portable phone on and off
3 Press briefly: delete the last
character entered
Press longer: delete the entire
number
4 Press briefly: dial or accept call
5 Enter digits 1– 9
6 Enter the special character
7 Enter the digit 0
8 Press briefly: enter the special
character
Press longer: pause for dialing
in the touch tone mode
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
177
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Hands-free system
The hands-free microphone is located on
the left-hand side on the headliner.
The hands-free system is activated when-
ever you establish or receive a call using
the following:
> Buttons on the steering wheel, page 16
> Voice command system, page 26,
except for incoming calls
> Control Center, page 175
> Telephone keypad, folding, page 176.
Volume adjustment
You can adjust the volume for the hands-
free unit:
Turn this button during a call to select the
desired volume.
The hands-free unit will remain at this vol-
ume level, even if the other audio sources
are set to minimum volume.
The system automatically selects your
individual volume setting each time
you unlock the vehicle using your personal
remote control.<
Starting an emergency call
1. To open the protective cover:
Briefly press the protective cover
2. Press the emergency call button for at
least 2 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the button lights
up. As soon as the voice connection to
the BMW Assist response center has
been established, the indicator lamp
flashes.
Conditions for an emergency call:
> Ignition key from radio position
> The wireless communications network
is available
> The emergency call system is operable.
If the current position of your vehicle can be
determined with vehicles with an activated
BMW Assist, it will be transmitted to the
BMW Assist response center.
A navigation CD/DVD must be
inserted, as otherwise the current
vehicle position cannot be determined.
If the navigation system is inoperative, the
current position of the vehicle is not trans-
mitted.<
Following transmission of the data a confir-
mation report will appear on the Control
Display. The response center can initiate
immediate action for emergency assis-
tance.
If it is repeatedly not possible to transfer
the data, a voice connection to the BMW
Assist response center will be established.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehi-
cle until the connection has been
established. You will then be able to pro-
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Using the phone in your vehicle
178
vide a detailed description of the situa-
tion.<
For technical reasons, the emergency
call cannot be guaranteed under
unfavorable conditions.<
Under certain conditions, an emergency
call is started automatically immediately
after a severe accident. The automatic
emergency call is not affected by the emer-
gency call button being pressed.
Commissioning
BMW portable phone
1. Pull back the cradle slightly
2. Insert the portable phone.
For portable phones with SIM
card: First switch on portable
phone and enter PIN, then insert.<
Before driving, place the BMW porta-
ble phone in the cradle. You can then
control the portable phone with the button
in the steering wheel, the Control Center,
the telephone keypad or the voice com-
mand system.<
Switching your BMW portable phone
on and off
You can switch your BMW portable
phone on and off by maintaining
extended pressure on the telephone key-
pad.
Entering lock code
If, after switching on the BMW portable
phone, you are requested by a message on
the Control Display to enter the lock code:
1. Enter the lock code, e.g. 1234
2. Press the button
Getting started
Making a call
1. Enter the desired phone number
2. Press the button
The phone number appears in the Control
Display's status line.
Always remember to enter the com-
plete telephone number, i.e. the area
code, even if you are currently in the same
area as the number that you wish to con-
tact.<
Ending a call
Press the button
1. {Dial number}
2. Enter the phone number
> Listen to the entered numerical
sequence:
{Read out}
> Delete the entire number:
{Delete}
3. {Dial}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Calls during a call
This function can only be used through the
keypad.
Accepting a call
Press the button
Rejecting a call
Press the button
Switching between two calls
Press button again
Ending a call when two connections
exist, switching between calls
Press the button
The current connection is terminated. The
second call kept on hold can now be con-
tinued.
The second calling party's number will be
displayed on the Control Display, even after
the second call is terminated.
Phone book
You must enter your portable phone's
phone book in the voice command system
before it will be available for access using
the vehicle's voice commands. This creates
a special voice-command phone book. If
changes are then made to the phone book
using the voice command system, these
modifications will apply exclusively to the
voice-command phone book, and not to
the phone book in the portable phone.
Creating and updating voice-
command phone book*
The entries in the portable phone's phone
book appear sequentially on the Info Dis-
play.
You must assign a specific name to each
number that you wish to transfer to the
voice-command phone book. These num-
bers will no longer be requested during
updates.
Making a new entry in voice-
command phone book
Dialing from phone book
1. Select "Communication"
> Select "A-Z" and confirm.
An alphabetical listing of all the
entries in the phone book appears
on the right side of the Control Dis-
play.
> Select "1,2,3" and confirm your
selection.
A listing of all entries in the phone
book appears on the right side of the
Control Display
2. Select the desired entry and confirm
your selection
3. Select and confirm your selec-
tion.
1. {Telephone}
2. {Update telephone book}.
1. {Save name}
2. Enter name and repeat entry upon
request
3. Enter phone numbers
4. {Save}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Using the phone in your vehicle
180
The connection is established.
Here, the dialed number appears in the
upper status line, refer to page 23.
The system dials the number.
The connection can also be estab-
lished using the button on the steer-
ing wheel or the telephone keypad.<
Select and confirm to end the call.
Viewing entries
Deleting individual entries
Deleting entire phone book
Selecting a number from
Top 8 list
The eight numbers that you call most fre-
quently on the BMW portable phone are
automatically stored in the Top 8 list.
The phone numbers are only stored in
the Top 8 list when these phone num-
bers are stored as an entry in the portable
phone.<
The number called most often appears at
the top of the list.
1. In the "Communication" menu, select
"TOP 8" and confirm your selection
2. Select an entry from the list that now
appears on the display, and confirm
your selection
3. Select and confirm your selec-
tion.
The connection is established. Here,
the dialed number appears in the upper
status line, refer to page 23.
The connection can also be set up
using the button on the steering
wheel or the telephone keypad.<
Select and confirm to end the call.
Redialing
Numbers that you reached on earlier
attempts as well as numbers that were
unavailable are automatically stored in your
redialing list. A total of 8 phone numbers
can be stored. The last number dialed is at
the top of the list.
1. Select "Communication"
2. Select "Last" and confirm your selection
3. Select an entry from the list that now
appears on the display, and confirm
your selection
4. Select and confirm your selec-
tion.
The connection is established. Here,
the dialed number appears in the upper
status line, refer to page 23.
The connection can also be set up
using the button on the steering
wheel or the telephone keypad.<
1. {Select name}
2. Enter name.
{Read out}
> To scroll forward:
{Next}
> To scroll back:
{Previous}
> To repeat entry:
{Repeat}
> To call:
{Dial}.
1. {Telephone}
2. {Delete entry}
3. Enter name.
1. {Telephone}
2. {Delete telephone book}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
181
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
You can use the voice command system to
redial the last number called:
Select and confirm to end the call.
Missed calls
If the phone number of the caller was trans-
ferred, you can have a list of all missed calls
displayed if this service is supported by
your wireless service provider.
1. Select "Communication"
2. Select "Missed" and confirm your
selection A call in your absence is indi-
cated with a letter icon in the upper sta-
tus line, refer to page 23
3. Select an entry from the list that now
appears on the display, and confirm
your selection
4. Select and confirm your selec-
tion.
The connection is established. Here,
the dialed number appears in the upper
status line, refer to page 23.
The connection can also be set up
using the button on the steering
wheel or the telephone keypad.<
Select and confirm to end the call.
{Redial}.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
BMW Assist
182
BMW Assist
To avoid posing an unnecessary haz-
ard, both to your own vehicle's occu-
pants and to other road users, only make
entries with the vehicle stationary.<
Requirements
If the following requirements are met, you
can call up BMW Assist:
> Telephone is connected and switched
on
> The lock code has been entered
> The mobile communications network is
available
> GPS reception for transmission of the
data is ensured.
The position of the vehicle can influ-
ence the mobile communications/
GPS reception. As a rule, mobile communi-
cations/GPS reception is only possible
under a clear sky.
When vehicle data is exchanged with the
BMW Service Center, a corresponding
message appears on the Control Display.<
Roadside Assistance of the
BMW Group
Here, you can automatically dial the num-
ber of the Roadside Assistance of the BMW
Group, your BMW center or BMW Cus-
tomer Relations.
To contact Roadside Assistance, for exam-
ple in the event of a breakdown:
1. Select "BMW Assist" and confirm your
selection
2. Select "BMW Services" and confirm
your selection
3. Select "Roadside Assistance" and con-
firm your selection.
The current vehicle position is dis-
played
4. Select "ACTIVATE" and confirm your
selection.
The data of your vehicle is transmitted
to BMW center.
The BMW center forwards the current vehi-
cle position and the customer profile and
other vehicle data to the relevant Roadside
Assistance service.
To speak to your BMW center or BMW
Customer Relations your portable phone
must be connected to the cradle in the cen-
ter console. A voice connection will be
established.
For technical reasons, the emergency
call cannot be guaranteed under
unfavorable conditions.<
*
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and
lubricants, wheels and tires, service,
maintenance and how to deal with any
problems that may occur.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Refueling
186
Refueling
Fuel filler door
Always switch off the engine before
refueling. If you do not, fuel cannot be
filled into the tank and a message will
appear in the Check Control.<
To open and close: briefly press the rear
edge of the fuel filler door.
Manual release
In the event of an electrical defect in the
system, you can release the fuel filler door
manually:
1. Lift the handle to remove the cover
panel on the right side of the luggage
compartment
2. Take the button with the fuel pump
symbol from the bracket and pull it to
unlock the fuel filler door.
Always observe all applicable precau-
tions and regulations when handling
fuels. Never carry spare fuel containers in
your vehicle. Whether empty or full, these
containers can leak, cause an explosion,
and lead to fire in the event of a collision.<
Simple and environmentally friendly
When handling fuels always observe
any safety guidelines posted at the
filling station.<
Put the filler cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler door.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting the filler
nozzle during refueling
> results in premature pump shutoff
> can lead to reduced efficiency in the
fuel-vapor recovery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle
clicks off the first time.
Closing fuel filler cap
Close the filler cap carefully after refu-
eling, continuing until you hear the
detent engage. While closing, be sure not
to squeeze the strap which is fastened to
the cap. A loose or missing cap will activate
a message
*
in the Check Control.<
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 23.2 US gallons/88 liters, including
the reserve capacity of approx. 2.6 gallons/
10 liters.
Never attempt to continue driving
until the tank is completely empty, as
engine functions could be affected, and the
vehicle could sustain damage as a result.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
187
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Fuel specification
The engine uses lead-free gasoline only.
Required fuel
Premium unleaded gasoline,
minimum octane rating: 91
Minimum octane rating corresponds to the
Anti Knock Index AKI and is determined
according to the so-called (R+M)/2
method.
Do not use leaded gasoline, as other-
wise the lambda probe and catalytic
converter will be permanently damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant
differences in fuel quality: volatility, compo-
sition, additives, etc., among gasolines
offered for sale in the United States and
Canada. Fuels containing up to and includ-
ing 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with
up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is,
15 % MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equiv-
alent amount of co-solvent, will not void the
applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may
result in drivability, starting and stall-
ing problems, especially under certain
environmental conditions such as high
ambient temperature and high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the
fuel you are using, we recommend that you
respond by switching to a recognized high-
quality brand.
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
tions may result in unscheduled mainte-
nance.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
188
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tire's service life, but
also driving comfort and – to a great extent
– driving safety that depend on the condi-
tion of the tires and the maintenance of the
specified tire pressure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regu-
larly and correct it if necessary,
including the spare tire: at least every two
weeks and before beginning a longer trip.
If you fail to observe this precaution you
may be driving on tires with incorrect tire
pressures, a condition that can not only
compromise your vehicle's stability, but
also lead to tire damage and the risk of an
accident.
Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires,
except run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously
impair your vehicle's handling and braking
response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire
can lead to loss of control over the vehi-
cle.<
Checking inflation pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum
of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the
vehicle has been parked for at least
2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire infla-
tion pressure increases.
After correcting the inflation pressure(s),
always reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,
refer to page 96.
Inflation pressures for standard tires
The inflation pressures for your standard
tires can be found on the door pillar when
you open the driver's door.
Inflation pressures for other tire
sizes
The table below provides all the correct
inflation pressures for the specified tire
sizes at ambient temperature.
After correcting the inflation pres-
sure(s), always reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor, refer to page 96.<
Tire size
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
189
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
745i, 745Li
760i, 760Li
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/50 R 18 100 V M+S
245/55 R 17 102 W
245/50 R 18 100 W
245/55 R 17 102 Q M+S
245/50 R 18 100 Q M+S
32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
Front: 245/45 R 19 98 W 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 W - 35/240 - 42/290
Front: 245/40 R 20 95 Y 32/220 - 35/240
Rear: 275/35 R 20 98 Y - 35/240 - 42/290
More details on the permitted load and weights can be found on page 216.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/50 R 18 100 V M+S
245/50 R 18 100 W
245/50 R 18 100 Q M+S
35/240 38/260 38/260 42/290
Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y - 38/260 - 42/290
Front: 245/40 R 20 95 Y 35/240 - 38/260
Rear: 275/35 R 20 98 Y - 38/260 - 42/290
More details on the permitted load and weights can be found on page 216.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
190
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of
the tire makes it easier to identify and
choose the right tires.
Tire size
Speed rating
Q = up to 105 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines
of the U.S. Department of Transport.
DOT code:
Tire age
The tire's date of manufacture is indicated
on the sidewall:
DOT ... 0904 indicates that the tire was
manufactured in the 9th week of 2004.
BMW recommends that you replace all
tires – including the spare – after a maxi-
mum of 6 years, even though the tires may
have a theoretical service life of up to 10
years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.<
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and one-half, 1γ, times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.<
e.g.
Nominal width
in mm
Cross-sectional
relationship in Ξ
Radial tire code
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not for ZR tires
Speed rating,
before R on ZR tires
245/45 R
1
9104H
e.g.
Manufacturer code
for tire makes
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0904
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
191
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest,
B and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified indoor lab-
oratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.<
RSC: run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the
side of the tire, refer to page 192.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than
summer tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for treadwear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects
lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Tire tread
The tread depth should not drop below
ε in/3 mm, although, for example, Euro-
pean legislation only specifies a minimum
tread depth of κ/ΦΚ in/1.6 mm. At tread
depths below ε in/3 mm, there is an
increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning,
even when only small amounts of water are
present on the road surface.
As winter tires display a noticeable loss in
their ability to cope with cold-weather driv-
ing conditions once the tread wears to
below κ/Κ in/4 mm, to ensure continued
safety you should always have such tires
replaced.
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base,
refer to arrow, are distributed over the tire's
circumference and are marked on the side
of the tire with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator.
These indicators signal at a tread depth of
κ/ΦΚ in/1.6 mm that the legally permitted
wear limit has been reached.
Wheel/tire damage
Due to low-profile tires, please note
that wheels, tires and suspension
parts are more susceptible to road hazard
and consequential damages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during
normal vehicle operation can indicate tire
failure or some other vehicle defect. This
can, for example, be caused by driving over
curbs. These kinds of problems may also
be signaled by other changes in vehicle
response, such as a strong tendency to pull
to the left or right.
In these cases reduce speed immediately.
Drive carefully to the next BMW center or
tire dealer, or have the vehicle towed to one
of these locations if necessary.
Tire damage, extending to sudden and
complete loss of pressure in extreme
cases, can pose a potentially lethal safety
hazard for the vehicle's occupants and
other road users alike.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
192
Run-flat tires*
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the
side of the tire.
The run-flat tires consist of self-supporting
tires and special rims. The tire reinforce-
ment ensures that the tire retains some
residual safety in the event of pressure
drop and driving remains possible to a
restricted degree.
Continuing driving with a damaged
tire
Driving on run-flat tires can continue,
depending on the vehicle load and the
severity of the tire damage, at a maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
In the case of complete inflation pressure
loss, 0 psi/kPa, or obvious tire damage,
you can estimate the possible distance for
continued driving on the basis of the fol-
lowing guide values:
> With low load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
Approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With medium load:
2 persons, luggage compartment full, or
4 persons without luggage:
Approx. 90 miles/150 km
> With full load:
More than 4 persons, luggage compart-
ment full:
Approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. With infla-
tion pressure loss, the driving characteris-
tics change, for example reduced track
stability on braking, extended braking dis-
tance, and altered self-steering character-
istics.
For safety reasons BMW recommends that
you do not have damaged run-flat tires
repaired, and that you go to a BMW center
in this case.<
New wheels and tires
Only have new wheels and tires
mounted by a specialist. If this work is
not carried out properly, there is a danger
of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards.<
You can ask your BMW center for the right
wheel and tire combination. Have the
wheel and tire assemblies balanced every
time either a wheel or a tire is replaced.
The correct wheel and tire combination
affects various systems whose function
would otherwise be impaired, e.g. ABS
or DSC.
BMW does not recommend the use of
retread tires, as otherwise driving
safety may be reduced. Possible variations
in the design and the age – which could be
substantial – of the carcasses can lead to
unusually rapid wear.<
The right wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that
BMW has tested and approved for your
particular vehicle. Variations in factors such
as manufacturing tolerances mean that
even wheels and tires with identical official
size ratings could actually have different
dimensions than the approved units – these
differences could lead to body contact, and
with it the risk of severe accidents. If non-
approved wheels and tires are used, BMW
cannot evaluate their suitability, and there-
fore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread
configuration from a single manufacturer.
After a flat tire, always remember to have
the original wheel and tire combination
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
193
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
remounted on the vehicle as soon as pos-
sible.
Recommended tire sizes and brands
BMW tests certain tire brands for each tire
size, classifies them as road-safe and
approves them. You can find out about
these at specialized dealers or at your
BMW center. Observe any country-specific
regulations, e.g. on making a correspond-
ing entry in the vehicle documents.
The factory-mounted tires have been spe-
cially selected to provide optimized perfor-
mance when installed on your vehicle; if
properly cared for, they will provide a com-
bination of safety and excellent ride com-
fort.
Run-flat tires
If your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires,
refer to Run-flat tires, only use these tires,
as in the event of a breakdown there is no
spare tire available.
Special characteristics of winter
tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in
cold winter driving conditions. Although so-
called all-season M+S tires provide better
winter traction than summer tires, they
generally fail to provide the same levels of
cold-weather performance as winter tires.
Run-flat tires
When mounting new tires or switching from
summer to winter tires, or vice versa, use
run-flat tires, as in the event of a break-
down there is no spare wheel available.
Your BMW center will be glad to advise
you.
Observing speed ratings
Never exceed the maximum speed
for which the winter tires are rated.
Unprofessional attempts by laymen to ser-
vice tires can lead to damage and acci-
dents. Have this work performed by skilled
professionals only. The technicians at your
BMW center will be glad to assist you with
the required professional knowledge and
specialized equipment.<
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as pos-
sible. Always protect tires against all con-
tact with oil, grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure indicated on the side wall of the
tire.
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain snow chains, clas-
sifies them as road-safe and approves
them. Consult your BMW center for more
information. BMW recommends only using
these approved, narrow-link snow chains.
Use on summer or winter tires is only per-
missible in pairs on the rear wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions
when installing snow chains.
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 30 mph/
50 km/h with the chains mounted.
After mounting snow chains, do not
activate the Flat Tire Monitor.
When you are driving with snow chains, it
can be beneficial to switch off DSC briefly,
refer to page 94.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Under the hood
194
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service
or repair operations on your vehicle
without the required, professional technical
training. If you are not familiar with the reg-
ulations to be observed, only have work on
your vehicle carried out by a BMW center
or a workshop that uses personnel trained
in accordance with BMW requirements. If
this work is not carried out properly, there
is a danger of subsequent damage and
related safety hazards.<
Hood
Unlocking
Pull the lever located under the left side of
the instrument panel.
Opening
Pull the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx.
16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be
clearly heard to engage.
Observe the same precautions that
apply to all closing operations by
ensuring that the hood's travel range is
clear and unobstructed before allowing the
hood to fall into position.
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while you are driving
your vehicle, you should stop at once and
close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
195
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Engine compartment
1 Engine oil dip stick, refer to Checking oil
level
2 Brake fluid reservoir, located beneath
the microfilter cover 197
3 Reservoir for windshield and headlamp
washer system 73
4 Engine oil filler neck 196
5 Vehicle identification number
6 Coolant expansion tank 196
7 Auxiliary terminal for jump-starting 210
Engine oil
Checking oil level
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface
2. Switch the engine off after it has
reached normal operating temperature
3. After approx. 5 minutes, pull the dip-
stick out and wipe it off with a clean lint-
free cloth, paper towel, or similar mate-
rial
4. Carefully push the dipstick all the way
into the guide tube and pull it out again
5. The oil should extend to between the
two marks on the dipstick.
As is the case with fuel economy, the rate
at which the engine uses oil is strongly
influenced by driving style and operating
conditions.
The oil quantity between the two marks
of the dipstick is approx. 1.65 US quarts/
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Under the hood
196
1.5 liter. Do not fill beyond the upper mark
on the dipstick. Excess oil can damage the
engine.
Adding engine oil
Wait until the level has dropped to just
above the lower mark or a message
appears in the Check Control before add-
ing oil.
Store oil, grease etc., well out of the
reach of children; always observe all
warning labels on the containers.<
Specified engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has
critical significance for the operation and
service life of an engine. BMW approves
only specific oils after confirming their suit-
ability for use in its vehicles with extensive
testing.
Use only approved BMW High Perfor-
mance Synthetic Oil.
If you are unable to obtain BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil, you can add small
amounts of another synthetic oil between
oil changes. Use only oils with the API SH
specification or higher.
Ask your BMW center for details con-
cerning the specific BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil or synthetic oils
which have been approved.<
You can also call BMW of North America
at 1-800-831-1117 or visit this website:
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this informa-
tion.
BMW engines are designed to oper-
ate without additives, and their use
could even lead to damage in some
cases.<
Viscosity ratings
Viscosity is the oil flow rating as defined in
SAE classes.
The selection of the correct SAE class
depends on the climatic conditions in the
area where you typically drive your BMW.
Approved oils are in SAE classes
5W-40 and 5W-30.<
These oils may be used for driving in all
ambient temperatures.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling sys-
tem when the engine is hot. Escaping
coolant can cause burns.<
Coolant consists of water and the addition
of antifreeze and anticorrosion agent. Not
all commercially available additives are
suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW cen-
ter for suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, as other-
wise engine damage may result. The
additives present a health hazard; observe
the instructions on the containers.<
Always observe all applicable rules
and regulations for environmental
protection when disposing of used anti-
freeze and anticorrosion agents.<
Checking coolant level
1. The engine must be at ambient temper-
ature
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank
counterclockwise to allow any accumu-
lated pressure to escape, then continue
turning to open
3. The coolant level is correct when the
coolant extends to between the MIN
and MAX marks on the filler neck, refer
to the diagram adjacent to the filler neck
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
197
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant
up to the specified level – do not overfill.
5. Twist closed the cap and tighten firmly
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss
eliminated as soon as possible.
Brake system
Malfunction
Brake fluid
The warning lamp lights up and a
message appears in the Check
Control: stop immediately.
The brake fluid in the reservoir has fallen to
below the minimum level. At the same time,
a considerably longer brake pedal travel
may be noticeable. Have the system
checked immediately.
Warning lamp on Canadian models.
During continued driving increased
brake pedal travel may be necessary,
and considerably longer braking distances
may result. Please adapt your driving style
accordingly.<
Brake pads
For messages and indicator lamps in the
Info Display, refer to page 83.
For your own safety: use only brake
pads that BMW has released for your
particular vehicle model. As BMW cannot
assess the suitability of other brake pads
for use on your vehicle, we are unable to
assume continued responsibility for the
vehicle's operating safety if non-approved
pads are installed.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Maintenance
198
Maintenance
The BMW Maintenance
System
The BMW Maintenance System serves to
retain the operating and road safety of your
BMW. The service schedule also includes
operations related to the vehicle's comfort
and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The aim is to optimize maintenance with
regard to reducing the cost of running the
vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to
sell your BMW, you will find that a complete
dealer service history is an asset of inesti-
mable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the
different driving conditions of your BMW
into account. As a result, Condition Based
Service determines the current and future
maintenance requirements. By letting you
define a service and maintenance regimen
that reflects your own individual require-
ments, the system forms the basis for trou-
ble-free driving.
The service requirement display, refer to
page 82, shows you the times or distances
remaining until the deadlines for selected
service and maintenance procedures, as
well as legally-mandated inspections:
> Engine oil
> Brakes, separate for front and rear
> Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
> Brake fluid
> Spark plugs
> Vehicle check
> Coolant
> Legally prescribed inspections depend-
ing on national regulations.
Your vehicle stores this information contin-
uously in the ignition key while the vehicle
is being driven. After accessing the data
stored in the vehicle key, your BMW service
advisor is able to suggest precisely the
right array of service procedures for your
own individual vehicle. You should there-
fore hand over to the BMW service advisor
the key you last used to drive when you
take your vehicle for service.
Storage periods with the battery dis-
connected are not taken into account
by the CBS maintenance system. Have the
time-dependent service and maintenance
operations, such as brake fluid and cool-
ant, and if necessary engine oil and the
micro/activated charcoal filter, updated by
a BMW center.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Additional information on required service
and maintenance operations is contained
in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod-
els.
BMW recommends having mainte-
nance and repairs carried out by your
BMW center.
Make sure that the maintenance operations
are confirmed in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models. These entries serve as
proof of the regular maintenance per-
formed on your BMW.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Rules and regulations
200
Rules and regulations
California laws
Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to issue the fol-
lowing warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior
furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain flu-
ids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that
have caused cancer in laboratory animals.
Always protect your skin by washing thor-
oughly with soap and water.<
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or
more sensing and diagnostic modules or a
recording device capable of recording or
transmitting certain vehicle data or infor-
mation. In addition, if you have a Subscrip-
tion Service Agreement for the BMW Assist
system, certain vehicle information may be
transmitted or recorded in order to provide
such services.
OBD socket
The Onboard Diagnostic OBD interface
socket is located on the left of the driver's
side under the instrument panel and under
a cover.
The cover has the letters OBD on it.
The purpose of the OBD system is to
ensure proper operation of the emission
control system for the vehicle's lifetime.
The system monitors emission-related
components and systems for deterioration
and malfunction.
The warning lamp lights up.
Worsening of the exhaust emission
values. Have the vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
When the fuel filler cap is not properly
tightened, the OBD system can
detect the vapor leak and the indicator
lamp will light up. If the filler cap is subse-
quently tightened, the indicator lamp
should go out within a few days.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
201
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
The onboard tool kit is located in the lug-
gage compartment lid.
Loosen the wingnut to open.
The adapter for the spare key can be stored
beneath the open-ended spanners.
Windshield wiper blades
To replace the blades, start by folding the
wipers out and away from the windshield,
refer to page 73.
Lamps and bulbs
The lamps and bulbs are essential factors
contributing to the safety of your vehicle.
Therefore, comply fully with the following
instructions during bulb replacement. If you
are not familiar with the specified proce-
dures, BMW recommends having the
replacements carried out at your BMW
center.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs
with yo ur bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life.
Use a clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the
bulb by its metal socket.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at your BMW center.
To prevent short circuits, before
working on any electrical system,
equipment or accessory you should always
switch it off and disconnect the cable from
the battery's negative terminal before start-
ing.
To avoid possible injury or equipment dam-
age when changing bulbs, observe any
instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
When maintaining the headlamps,
please comply with the instructions in
the separate Caring for your vehicle bro-
chure.<
Headlamps
For checking and adjusting headlamp
aim, please contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Engine compartment, left side:
Turn the quick-release snaps 905 counter-
clockwise and remove the cover.
After replacing the bulb return the cover to
its original position and press the quick-
release clamps down.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Replacing components
202
Releasing lamp cover
The illustration shows the left side of the
engine compartment.
1 High beams
Press the tab down, refer to arrow.
Always wear gloves and eye protec-
tion – the atmosphere within the bulb
is pressurized. Failure to observe this pre-
caution can lead to personal injury should
the bulb be damaged.<
1 High beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
1. Remove the cover
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and
remove
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Xenon lamps
The service life of these bulbs is very long
and the probability of a failure is very low,
provided that they are not switched on and
off an unusual number of times. In the
unlikely event that one of these lamps
should fail, you can respond by switching
on your fog lamps and proceeding care-
fully, where allowed by law.
Only have work on the xenon lighting
system including bulb changes car-
ried out by a BMW center or a workshop
that uses personnel trained in accordance
with BMW requirements. Due to the high
voltage involved, there is a danger to life
and limb when work is carried out improp-
erly.<
Parking and standing lamps
In the event of a malfunction, please con-
tact your BMW center.
Turn signals, front
Two bulbs, 3457AK or 3457NAK
*
1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and
remove
2. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and
replacement.
Side-mounted turn signals
Bulb 5 watts, W 5 W
1. Press against the front edge of the lamp
with the tip of your finger, then push it to
the rear and release the detent at the
front
2. Turn the lamp 903 and remove
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and
remove
4. Extract the bulb for replacement.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
203
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Side marker lamps, front and rear
Please contact your BMW center for
replacement.
Tail lamps
1 Rear lamp
2 Brake lamp
3 Backup lamp
4 Turn signals
5 Reflector
The parking, tail and brake lamps are
LEDs. If a defect occurs, please con-
tact your BMW center or a workshop that
uses personnel trained in accordance with
BMW requirements.<
Fender-mounted lamps
The illustration shows the recess on the left
side of the luggage compartment.
Rear turn signals
Bulb 21 watts, P 21 W or PY 21 W
*
1. Use the handle at the top to swivel
down the side trim panel
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and
remove
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and
replacement.
Lamps in luggage compartment lid
Remove the trim panel from the luggage
compartment lid.
1 Backup lamp
2 License plate lamp
Backup lamps and
license plate lamps
Backup lamp: bulb 16 watts, W 16 W
License plate lamp: Bulb 5 watts, W 5 W
1. Pull the bulb holder out
2. Extract the bulb for replacement.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Replacing components
204
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind
translucent lenses serve as the light source
for many of the controls and displays in
your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes,
which operate using a concept similar to
that applied in conventional lasers, are offi-
cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for sev-
eral hours, as irritation of the iris could
result.<
Changing wheels
Safety precautions to observe in the
event of a flat and during all tire
changes:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
passing traffic. Park on a firm, flat, surface.
Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Engage the parking brake and move the
transmission's selector lever to P.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain outside
the immediate area in a safe place, such as
behind a guardrail.
If a warning triangle or portable hazard
warning lamp is required, set it up on the
roadside at an appropriate distance from
the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all
safety guidelines and regulations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm sur-
face which is not slippery. The vehicle or
the jack could slip to the side if you attempt
to raise the vehicle on a soft or slippery sur-
face such as snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar
object as a support base for the jack, as
this would prevent it from extending to its
full support height and reduce its load-
carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie
under the vehicle, and never start the
engine while it is supported by the jack.<
What you will need
To avoid rattling noises, note the positions
of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after
completing work.
> Lug wrench
Located beside the spare tire
> Wheel chock
The chock is located next to the spare
tire, or behind the trim panel on the left
side of the luggage compartment on
vehicles equipped with a trailer cou-
pling.
Remove the floor mat and the cover
above the spare tire.
Unscrew the wingnut and remove the
wheel chock
> Vehicle jack
Located in the luggage compartment
behind the right-hand side panel.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
205
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Grasp the handle in the upper panel and
fold it down.
Undo the wingnut and remove the jack.
After use, screw the jack all the way
back down and snap the handle back
into place.
Spare tire
1. Unscrew the wing nut 1
2. Remove the disc 2 to the side
3. Completely unscrew the threaded rod 3
4. Remove the spare tire.
Preparing wheel change
1. Read carefully and comply with the
safety precautions on page 204
2. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling:
Place the wheel chock against the rear
surface of the front tire on the side
opposite the side being raised. If the
vehicle is parked on a downward slope,
place the wheel chock securely in front
of the tire. On a steep grade, also
secure the vehicle against rolling
3. Loosen the lug bolts 1/2 a turn.
Lifting vehicle
1. Position the jack at the jacking point
closes to the wheel so that the entire
jack base makes contact vertically
under the jacking point
The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only. Do not
attempt to raise another vehicle model
with it or to raise any load of any kind.
To do so could cause accidents and
personal injury.<
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when crank-
ing up the jack, refer to section of illus-
tration
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you
are changing is raised from the ground.
Mounting a wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt
from the mounting surfaces of the
wheel and hub. Clean the lug bolts
3. Position the wheel or spare tire on the
hub and screw in at least two bolts
diagonally.
When you mount wheels other than
Genuine BMW light-alloy wheels, differ-
ent lug bolts may also be required
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts.
Tighten all the bolts securely in a diag-
onal pattern
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack
from beneath the vehicle.
Following installation
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pat-
tern
To ensure safety, always have the
lug bolts checked with a cali-
brated torque wrench as soon as possi-
ble to ensure that they are tightened to
the specified torque. The tightening
torque is 140 Nm.<
2. Reverse the removal sequence when
storing the wheel and tools in the vehi-
cle
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Replacing components
206
3. Check and correct the tire inflation
pressure at the earliest opportunity
Protect valve stems and valve
stem seal caps against dirt and
contamination. Dirt in valve stems is a
frequent source of gradual air loss.<
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer
to page 96
5. Replace the damaged tire with a new
one as soon as possible and have the
new wheel balanced.
Driving with spare tire
On certain wheel-tire combinations,
the size of the spare tire deviates from
that of the rest of the tires. The spare tire is
fully capable of running in all load and
speed ranges. However, to recreate the
original conditions, the tire should be
replaced as soon as possible.<
Run-flat tires*
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the
side of the tire. They consist of self-con-
tained tires and special rims. The tire rein-
forcement ensures that the tire retains
some residual safety in the event of pres-
sure drop and driving remains possible to a
restricted degree. The vehicle is equipped
with a Flat Tire Monitor which indicates
punctures.
The reinforcement on the flanks of the
tires means that it is usually not pos-
sible to detect an air loss from outside.<
Flat tire
If you have a flat tire, the indicator lamp
symbol in the Check Control will light up in
red, and a message will appear. In addition,
a gong sounds.
You can find more detailed information on
the Flat Tire Monitor on page 96.
Reduce vehicle speed carefully to under
50 mph/80 km/h, avoiding hard brake
applications and steering maneuvers.
If the defective wheel is not recognizable as
such immediately, check the inflation pres-
sure in all four tires.
For reasons of safety, do not arrange
for run-flat tires to be repaired. Your
BMW center has the information needed
for working with these tires and is equipped
with the necessary special tools.<
Continuing driving with a damaged
tire
Driving on run-flat tires can continue
depending on the vehicle load and the
severity of the tire damage, at a maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. You can deter-
mine the possible mileage for continued
driving on the basis of the following general
indications:
> Tire inflation pressure 0 psi/kPa:
With empty vehicle approx. 90 miles/
150 km
With full payload approx. 30 miles/
50 km
> Tire inflation pressure 7 psi/50 kPa to
15 psi/100 kPa:
Approx. 300 miles/500 km
> Tire inflation pressure greater than
15 psi/100 kPa:
Approx. 600 miles/1,000 km.
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the case
of air loss, you can expect changes in vehi-
cle handling such as reduce lane stability,
longer braking distances, and changes in
self-steering properties.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e.,
the electrolyte will last for the life of the bat-
tery when the vehicle is operated in a tem-
perate climate. Your BMW center will be
happy to advise you on all questions con-
cerning the battery.
Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via
the terminals in the engine compartment
with the engine off. Connections, refer to
Jump-starting on page 210.
Battery switch
Before storing the vehicle for an extended
period of several weeks or more, slide the
battery switch located behind the trim
panel on the right side of the luggage com-
partment to OFF. This reduces the current
flow from the battery for the period during
which the vehicle remains parked. A mes-
sage appears in the Check Control. Please
take note of the supplementary information
provided on the Control Display.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of follow-
ing replacement at your BMW center
or bring them to a collection point. Maintain
the battery in an upright position for trans-
port and storage. Always secure the battery
to prevent it from tipping over during trans-
port.<
Power failure
Following a temporary power failure, e.g. in
the case of a flat battery, some equipment
is subject to restricted use and must be
reinitialized. Individual settings are also lost
and must be updated again:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The positions must be stored again,
refer to page 55
> Time and date
Must be updated again, refer to
page 90
> Radio
Stations must be stored again, refer to
page 154
> Navigation system
The operability must be waited for, refer
to page 130.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse,
and do not replace a defective fuse
with a substitute of another color or amper-
age rating, as this could lead to a circuit
overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the
vehicle.<
Spare fuses are located on the fuse strip in
the glove compartment; plastic tweezers
can be found at the fuse holder in the lug-
gage compartment.
In glove compartment
Press the tab on the cover to the front, then
fold up the cover.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Replacing components
208
In luggage compartment
Use the handle to pull down the trim on the
right wall.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Giving and receiving assistance
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is conveniently stored
in the onboard tool kit mounted on the
inside of the luggage compartment lid.
Comply with legal requirements
requiring you to carry a hazard warn-
ing triangle in the vehicle.<
First-aid kit*
You will also find the first-aid kit in the
onboard tool kit's container.
Some of the articles contained in the
first-aid kit have a limited service life.
Therefore, check the expiration dates of the
contents regularly and replace the contents
concerned in good time if necessary. You
can find replacements in any pharmacy.
Comply with legal requirements requiring
you to carry a first-aid kit in the vehicle.<
Jump-starting
When your battery is discharged you can
use two jumper cables to start your vehicle
with power from the battery in a second
vehicle. You can also use the same method
to help start another vehicle. Use only
jumper cables with fully-insulated terminal
clamps.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal
injury, always avoid all contact with
electrical components while the engine is
running. Carefully adhere to the following
sequence, both to prevent damage to one
or both vehicles, and to guard against pos-
sible personal injury.<
Preparing
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance
in Ah. This information can be found on
the battery
2. Switch off the engine of the support
vehicle
3. Switch off any electrical systems and
components in both vehicles.
Ensure that no contact exists
between the bodywork on the two
vehicles, otherwise there is a danger of
short circuits.<
Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks,
always observe this sequence when
connecting jumper cables.<
Your BMW is equipped with an auxiliary
terminal specifically designed for jump-
starting. It is located within the engine
compartment, refer to arrow 1 in the illus-
tration. The symbol + is embossed on the
cover.
1. Remove the cover of the BMW auxiliary
terminal for jump-starting
2. Connect one terminal clamp of the pos-
itive/+ jumper cable to the positive ter-
minal of the battery or an auxiliary termi-
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
210
nal for jump-starting of the vehicle
providing starting assistance
3. Connect the second terminal clamp of
the positive/+ jumper cable to the posi-
tive terminal of the battery or to an aux-
iliary terminal for jump-starting of the
vehicle to be started
On your BMW, there is a special nut as
body ground on the suspension strut
dome, refer to arrow 2 in the illustration.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable
minus/– to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground
of the vehicle providing assistance
5. Connect the second terminal clamp of
the negative/– jumper cable to the neg-
ative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to
be started.
Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the support vehicle
and allow it to run for several minutes at
a fast idle
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in
the usual way.
If the first start attempt is not success-
ful, wait a few minutes before another
attempt in order to allow the discharged
battery to recharge
3. Allow the engines to run for several
minutes
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by
reversing the connection sequence.
If required, have the battery inspected and
recharged at your BMW center.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Towing
Using tow fitting
The threaded tow fitting is stored in the
onboard tool kit and must always remain in
the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the BMW.
To avoid damage to the tow fitting
and the vehicle, observe the follow-
ing: only use the tow fitting that comes with
the vehicle and screw it in as far as it will
go. Only use the tow fitting to tow on roads.
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.<
Access to screw thread
Press the arrow symbol to push out the
cover.
Being towed
Do not tow the vehicle by the rear
axle; because the steering detent is
not operational, the wheels could turn to an
extreme angle during towing. There is no
power assist with the engine stopped. This
then requires increased effort for braking
and steering.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers
depending on the local regulations. If the
electrical system fails, mark the vehicle to
be towed, e.g. with a sign or warning trian-
gle in the rear window.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Selector lever in position N. Manual
release of the transmission lockout,
refer to page 70. Do not exceed a towing
speed of 45 mph/70 km/h and a towing dis-
tance of 90 miles/150 km, as otherwise the
automatic transmission may be dam-
aged.<
Towing methods
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted.
Familiarize yourself with the regulations on
towing in the respective country.
With tow bar
The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed, other-
wise it mill not be possible to control vehi-
cle response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the
same side on both vehicles. Should it prove
impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar
at an offset angle, please observe the fol-
lowing:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability
will be strictly limited in corners
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar
will exert lateral forces, tending to push
the vehicle sideways.
Secure the tow bar on the tow fitting
only. Otherwise damage could result
on other vehicle parts.<
With tow-rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle,
make sure that the tow-rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components
when towing, always use nylon ropes or
nylon straps. Secure the tow rope on the
tow fitting only. Otherwise damage could
result on other vehicle parts.<
With tow truck
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a load bed.
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or
body and chassis parts, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
This is where to look to find information on
any desired topic as quickly as possible.
This chapter includes the section with
technical information as well as
the manual's index.
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Technical data
214
Technical data
Engine specifications
745i, 745Li 760i/760Li
Displacement
Number of cylinders
cu in/cmµ 268.4/4,398
8
364.4/5,972
12
Maximum output
at engine speed
hp
rpm
325
6,100
438
6,000
Maximum torque
at engine speed
lb ft/Nm
rpm
330/450
3,600
444/600
3,950
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Technical data
216
Weights
Never exceed either the approved
axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.
745i 745Li
Curb weight lbs./kg 4,376/1,985 4,464/2,025
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 5,434/2,465 5,523/2,505
Load Ibs./kg 1,058/480 1,059/480
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,557/1,160 2,602/1,180
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,987/1,355 3,020/1,370
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100
Luggage compartment volume cu ft/l 17.7/500
760i 760Li
Curb weight lbs./kg 4,762/2,160 4,872/2,210
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 5,820/2,640 5,930/2,690
Load Ibs./kg 1,058/480 1,058/480
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,778/1,260 2,833/1,285
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 3,109/1,410 3,109/1,410
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100
Luggage compartment volume cu ft/l 17.7/500 17.7/500
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
217
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank
Reserve
gal./liters
gal./liters
approx. 23.3/88
approx. 2.6/10 Fuel specification: page 187
Windshield and headlight
washer system
quarts/liters approx. 6.3/6.0
For details: page 73
Engine with oil filter change
745i, 745Li
760i, 760Li
quarts/liters
quarts/liters
8.5/8.0
9.0/8.5
BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
Specifications: page 196
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
218
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
A/C operation
– automatic climate
control 105
"ABC..." for navigation 132
ABS Antilock Brake
System 92
– indicator lamp 13
ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 75
"ACCEPT" for
navigation 137, 143
Accepting call
– automatic 177
– during a call 179
Accessories, refer to Your
individual vehicle 5
Accident, refer to
– Giving and receiving
assistance 209
– Roadside Assistance 182
"ACTIVATE",
BMW Assist 182
Activated-charcoal
filter 108
Active cruise control 75
– malfunction 80
Active head restraints,
front 49
Active seat 53
Active seat ventilation 52
Adapter for spare key 35
Adaptive Head Light 101
Address
– deleting 143
– displaying 142
– entering 143
– storing 142
– storing current
position 143
"Address book" for
navigation 142
Adjust cooling capacity of
rear air conditioner 109
Adjusting interior
temperature 105
Adjusting seats 47
Air, drying, refer to
A/C operation 105
Airbags 98
– indicator lamp 13
– safe sitting position 46
Air conditioner in the
rear 109
Air conditioner mode 105
Air conditioning in rear 109
Air conditioning while
parked 110
Air distribution
– automatic climate
control 104, 107
– individual 108
Airing, refer to
Ventilation 106, 110
Air jets, refer to
Ventilation 106, 110
Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 188
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated air 105
Air supply
– automatic climate
control 105
– rear air conditioner 109
Air vents, refer to
Ventilation 106
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 187
Alarm system 42
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 43
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 193
Altering stretch of road 140
Alternate route, refer to
Detour 140
"AM..."
– audio mode 148
– radio 152, 154
AM waveband 152
"ANGLE" for
DVD mode 169
Antenna 174
Antenna for portable
phone 174
Antifreeze
– coolant 196
– washer fluid 73
Antilock Brake System ABS
– indicator lamp 13
Anti-theft alarm system 35
– refer to Alarm system 42
Anti-trapping mechanism
– glass roof, electric 45
– power windows 44
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 115, 118
"Arrow display" for
navigation 139, 140
Arrow display for
navigation 140
"AS ADDRESS", navigation
– creating directory 142
– current position 143
– destination entry 133
– destination list 137
– home address 142
– recent destinations 136
"AS DEST.", navigation
– recent destinations 136
Ashtray 117
– front 117
– rear 117
Assist 182
Assistance system, refer to
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 93
Assistance window
– help texts 22
– refer to Control Center 22
– status lines 23
AUC Automatic
recirculated-air
control 105
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
219
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
"Audio"
– audio mode 148
– radio 152
Audio 148
– adjusting tone 149
– controls 148
– switching on/off 149
– volume 149
"AUDIO" for
DVD mode 169
Audio mode 148
"AUTO", automatic climate
control 107
Automatic
– air distribution 104
– air supply 104
– headlamp control 100
– luggage compartment lid
operation 36, 41
– steering wheel
adjustment 54
– windshield washer 72
Automatic car wash, refer
to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Automatic climate
control 103
– rear air conditioner 109
– rear cooler 114
– settings in Control
Display 107
Automatic curb monitor 56
Automatic Hold
– parking 65
– parking brake 65
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 105
Automatic soft closing
– doors 39
– luggage compartment
lid 40
Automatic station
search 152
Automatic station
storage 153
Automatic transmission
with Steptronic 68
– ignition 62
– interlock 62
– selector lever interlock 68
– shiftlock 69
– towing 210
"AUTO P"
– function button 54
– vehicle 65
AUTO program, refer to
Automatic air
distribution 104
"AUTOSTOR" for radio 154
Average fuel
consumption 86
– setting units 89
Average speed 86
– setting units 89
"Avoid highway" 137
Avoiding tolls 137
"Avoid route" 141
"Avoid sect." 140
"Avoid tolls" 137
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 216
"A-Z", telephone 179
B
Backrests, refer to Seat
adjustment 47, 48
Backrest width
adjustment 47
Backup lamps, bulb
replacement 203
"Balance" in audio
mode 150
Bandages, refer to
First-aid kit 209
Bar, towing 211
"Bass" in audio mode 150
Battery 207
– indicator lamp 207
– jump-starting 209
– remote control 34
– switch 207
"BC", refer to Computer 87
Belts, refer to Safety
belts 51
Beverage holders 116
Blower, automatic climate
control 103
BMW active seat 53
"BMW Assist" 182
BMW Assist 182
BMW Maintenance
System 198
"BMW Services",
BMW Assist 182
Bottle holder, refer to
Beverage holders 116
Brake fluid 197
– indicator lamp 13
– level 197
Brake Force Display 97
Brake hydraulic
systems 197
Brake lamps
– adaptive, refer to Brake
force display 97
– bulb replacement 203
– indicator lamp, defective
lamp 83
Brake pad wear indicator,
indicator lamp 13
Brake rotors
– brake system 123
– break-in 122
Brakes 123
– ABS 92
– brake fluid 197
– break-in 122
– indicator/warning
lamps 13, 92, 94
– parking brake 64
Brake system 197
– brake fluid level 197
– brake pads 82
– break-in 122
– disc brakes 123
– indicator lamp 13
Breakdown recovery, refer
to Roadside
Assistance 182
Breakdown service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 182
Break-in procedures 122
"Brief info", Control
Center 22
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
220
"Brightness"
– in the Control Center 90
– in TV mode 164
Brightness 90
– in TV mode 164
– on Control Display 90
Bulb replacement, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 201
Buttons on multi-function
steering wheel 16
– automatic transmission
with Steptronic 70
Bypassing traffic
congestion 140
C
Calculating distance 86
California laws
– Event Data Recorders 200
– Proposition 65
Warning 200
Call
– beginning 178
– during a call 179
– ending 178
– replacing 179
– when absent 181
Calling
– from phone book 179
– from the Top 8 list 180
– redialing 180
– with telephone keypad,
folding 176
Calls, switching between
two calls 179
Can holder, refer to
Beverage holders 116
Capacities 217
Car care, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Car-care products, refer to
the Caring for your vehicle
brochure
"Car data", vehicle 84
Care, refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish,
refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Car jack points 205
Car key, refer to
Key/remote control 34
Carpet care, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Car phone, refer to
separate portable phone
Owner's Manual 174
Car radio, refer to
Radio 152
Car wash 122
– refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– with Comfort Access 122
Catalytic converter, refer to
High temperatures 122
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 92
– warning lamp 13
CBS Condition Based
Service 198
"CD"
– in audio mode 148
– in CD player mode 158
CD changer 160
– adjusting tone 149
– controls 148
– fast forward, reverse 162
– location 160
– random sequence 161
– sampling 161
– selecting a CD 161
– selecting track 162
– starting 160
– volume 149
CD player 158
– adjusting tone 149
– controls 148
– fast forward, reverse 159
– random sequence 158
– sampling 158
– selecting tracks 158
– starting 158
– volume 149
Center armrest 115, 118
Center brake lamp, bulb
replacement 203
Center console, refer to
Comfort features 14
Central locking system 35
– Comfort Access 37
– interior 38
"CHANGE" for
navigation 137
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing language 89
Changing navigation CDs/
DVDs 130
Changing scale 140
Changing settings on the
Control Display 89
Changing time display 89
Changing units of measure
in Control Display 89
Changing wheels 204
Charge current indicator
lamp 83
CHECK button 84
Check Control 83
– "Check" 84
Child's seats, refer to Child-
restraint systems 58
Child-restraint systems 58
Child-safety lock 60
Chrome parts, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Chrome-plated parts, care,
refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Cigarette lighter 117, 118
Cleaning, vehicle, refer to
the Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Cleaning windshield 72
Climate comfort
windshield 126
"Climate" for seat
heating 52
"Clock" 90
Clock 81
– 12/24-hour mode 89
– setting 90
– setting time and date 90
Closing
– from inside 38
– from outside 35
Clothes hooks 116
Cockpit 10, 14
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
221
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Coin holder, refer to
Storage
compartments 115
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 63
"Color" in TV mode 164
Comfort Access 37
– changing battery 37
– observe in the car
wash 122
Comfort features 14
Comfort mode, vehicle 95
Comfort seat 47
– in rear 48
Comfort starting, refer to
Starting engine 63
"Comm.",
Control Center 24
Compact Disc, refer to
– CD changer 160
– CD player 158
Compartments, refer to
Storage
compartments 115
Computer 85
– "BC" 87
– Control Display screen
contents 87
Condensation, refer to
A/C operation 122
Condition Based Service
CBS 198
Configuring adjustments 56
"CONFIRM", vehicle 83
Connecting a car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Lighter
socket 117
Consumption, refer to
Average consumption 86
Consumption display,
refer to
– Control Display screen
contents 87
– Fuel gauge 85
Contents 3
"Contrast" in TV mode 164
Contrast in TV mode 164
Control Center 17
– adjusting the
brightness 90
– assistance window 22
– automatic climate
control 107
– changing menu page 19
– changing settings 89
– confirming selection or
entry 18
– display, menus 21
– displaying help text 22
– language selection 89
– lists 19
– menu item selection 18
– menus 21
– rear 24
– selecting units of measure
and display format 89
– setting time and date 90
– status lines 23
– symbols 20
– symbols and lists 19
Control Display 18
– rear 24
Controller, refer to
Control Center 17
Controls 10, 14
– refer to Cockpit 10, 14
Convenience operation
– from inside 38
– from outside 36, 38
– glass roof, electric 36, 38
– windows 36, 38
Coolant 196
– indicator lamp 83
– level 196
– temperature gauge 83
Cooler, refer to Rear
cooler 114
Cooling
– maximum 105, 109
– refer to Temperature 105
Cooling system 196
Copyright 2
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 92
Creating voice address
book 143
Cruise control 73, 75
– indicator lamp 11
– multi-function steering
wheel 11
Cruising range 86
Cup holder, refer to
Beverage holders 116
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 216
Current fuel
consumption 86
Current position
– correcting 143
– displaying 143
– entering 143
– storing 143
Cylinders, refer to Engine
specifications 214
D
Dashboard 10, 14
Data 214
– dimensions 215
– engine 214
– filling capacities 217
– technical 214
– weights 216
"Date" 90
Date 90
– changing 90
– display format 89
– displaying 90
Daytime driving lamps 100
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 94
– indicator lamp 13
Defect
– door lock 38
– fuel filler door 186
– glass roof, electric 45
– luggage compartment
lid 41
Defective lamp 201
Defroster
– rear window 104
– windshield 105
Defrosting position, refer to
Defrosting windows 105
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
222
Defrosting windows 105
– automatic climate
control 105
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation,
automatic climate
control 105
Defrosting windshield,
refer to Defrosting
windows 105
"DELETE" for
navigation 136, 137
Destination address
– deleting 137
– entering 134
Destination for
navigation 132
– selecting using voice 142
– selecting via
information 135
Destination guidance 139
– changing route
specifications 137
– continuing 142
– displaying driving
route 131
– distance and arrival 86
– interrupting 142
– interrupting voice
instructions 141
– selecting new route 140
– starting 139
– terminating 142
– volume of voice
instructions 141
Destinations recently
driven to 137
"Dest. input" for
navigation 132
"Detour" for navigation 141
Dialed numbers for
telephone 180
Differential, break-in 122
Digital clock 81
Dimensions 215
Dimmed interior mirror 53
Dipstick, engine oil 195
Directional indicators,
refer to Turn signals 71
Direction instruction, refer
to Voice instructions 141
Directory, refer to
– Address book 142
– Phone book 179
Disc brakes 123
Displacement, refer to
Engine specifications 214
Display, refer to Control
Display 18
Display direction,
altering 140
Display elements 12
Display illumination 101
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 101
Display of faults 83
Displays, refer to Info
Display 12
Disposal
– battery of remote
control 37
– vehicle battery 207
Distance 86
– unit of measure 89
Distance control, refer to
Active cruise control 75
Distance to destination 86
Distance warning 91
Door entry lighting 102
Door keys 34
Door lock 38
DOT Quality Grades 190
Draft-free ventilation 106
Driving lamps, refer to
Parking lamps/
low beams 100
Driving notes 122
Driving stability control 92
Driving through water,
flooding 123
Driving time 87
Dry air, refer to
A/C operation 105
"DSC", vehicle 94
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 93
– indicator lamp 13
"DTC", vehicle 93
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 93
– indicator lamp 13
"DVD"
– in audio mode 148
– in DVD mode 166
DVD changer 165
– adjusting picture 168
– adjusting tone 149
– controls 148
– country codes 166
– DVD controller 166
– fast forward 167
– fast reverse 167
– freezing frame 168
– searching for chapter 168
– selecting a track 167
– selecting DVD 167
– selecting language 168
– selecting picture
format 168
– selecting subtitles 168
– specific menu 169
– starting 166
– volume 149
DVD multimedia changer,
refer to DVD changer 165
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 94
– indicator lamp 13
Dynamic destination
guidance, traffic
information during
destination guidance 140
Dynamic Drive 95
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 93
– indicator lamp 13
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 93
– indicator lamp 13
E
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 93
EDC Electronic Damping
Control 95
Editorial notice 5
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
223
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Electrical defect
– door lock 38
– driver's door 38
– fuel filler door 186
– glass roof, electric 45
– luggage compartment
lid 40
– parking brake 66
– transmission interlock for
automatic transmission
with Steptronic 70
Electric steering wheel
adjustment 54
Electronic Damping Control
EDC 95
Electronic Stability
Program ESP, refer to
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 93
Electronic toll collection
device, refer to
Entry/pass tags 126
Emergency actuation, refer
to Manual operation
– driver's door 38
– fuel filler door 186
– glass roof, electric 45
– luggage compartment
lid 40
– parking brake 66
– transmission interlock for
automatic transmission
with Steptronic 70
Emergency call 177
– dialing phone number 178
– with emergency call
button 177
Emergency release of
luggage compartment lid
from luggage
compartment's interior 41
Emergency services, refer
to Roadside
Assistance 182
"Emissions inspection",
vehicle 83
Energy-conscious driving,
refer to Energy Control 86
Energy Control 86
Engaging locks from
inside 39
Engine
– break-in 122
– data 214
– indicator lamp 13
– speed 214
– starting 63
– switching off 63
Engine compartment 195
Engine coolant 196
Engine oil 195
– filling capacity 217
– indicator/warning lamp 83
– specified engine oils 196
Engine oil level 195
Engine oil pressure 83
Engine oil sensor 83
Engine output, refer to
Engine specifications 214
Engine specifications 214
Engine speed 214
Entering country 133
Entering house number 134
Entering intersection 134
Entering street 134
Entering switch-on time of
independent ventilation
system 110
"Entertainm.",
Control Center 24
"Entertainment" in audio
mode 148
Entry/pass tags 126
Entry map for current
position and
destination 132
Environmentally friendly
driving, refer to
Energy Control 86
Equalizer 150
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 93
Exhaust system, refer to
High temperatures 122
Exterior mirrors 53
– automatic dimming
feature 53
"Extra"
– rear air conditioning 109
– rear cooler 114
F
"Fader" in audio mode 150
Failure messages 13
– refer to Check Control 83
Failure of a current
consumer 207
False alarm, refer to
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 43
Fan, refer to Air supply 105
Fasten safety belt 51
Fastest route 137
"Fastest route" for
navigation 137
Fast forward
– CD 159, 162
– DVD 167
Fault displays, refer to
Check Control 83
Filter, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal
filter 108
Fine wood, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 209
First-aid kit 209
Fittings for tow-starting and
towing 210
Flashlight, refer to
Rechargeable
flashlight 115
Flat tire 206
– Flat Tire Monitor 95
– refer to Tire condition 191
– run-flat tires 206
– spare tire 205
Flat Tire Monitor 95
– indicator lamp 96
Flooding, refer to Driving
through water 123
Floor coverings, carpet,
refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Floor mat, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
224
"FM..."
– audio mode 148
– radio 152
FM, waveband 152
Fog lamps 101
– indicator lamp 11
Footbrake, refer to
Driving notes 123
Front airbags 98
Front armrest 115
Front fog lamps
– indicator lamp 11
Front passenger airbags,
deactivating 58
Fuel 187
– average consumption 86
– gauge 86
– quality 187
– volume 217
Fuel filler door 186
– releasing in the event of
an electrical defect 186
Fuel level, refer to
Fuel gauge 85
Fuel level gauge, refer to
Fuel gauge 85
Fuel level indicator, refer to
Fuel gauge 86
Fuel-saving driving, refer to
Energy Control 86
Fuel tank capacity 217
"FULL MENU" in DVD
mode 167, 168
"Full Release",
Control Center 24
Fuses 207
G
Garage door opener, refer
to Integrated universal
remote control 112
Gasoline, refer to Fuel
specifications 187
Gear changes, refer to
Automatic transmission
with Steptronic 70
Gear indicator 68
General driving notes 122
Glasses compartment 116
Glass roof, electric,
convenience
operation 36, 38
Glove compartment 115
GPS, refer to Navigation
system 130
Grills, refer to
Ventilation 106
Gross weight, refer to
Weights 216
H
Handbrake 64
– Automatic Hold 65
– indicator lamp 13
Hands-free mode 177
Hands-free system 177
Hazard warning flashers 15
Head airbags 98
Headlamp control,
automatic 100
Headlamp cover, care,
refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Headlamp flasher 71
– indicator lamp 13
Headlamps 100
– bulb replacement 201
– care, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Headlamp washer fluid
tank, capacity, refer to
Filling capacities 217
Headlamp washer system
– cleaning headlamps 72
– fluid tank 73
– washer fluid 73
Head Light, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 101
Headphones 25
Head restraints 49
– front head restraints,
active 49
Heated mirrors 53
Heated rear window,
automatic climate
control 104
Heated seats 52
Heated steering wheel 54
Heated windshield,
automatic climate
control 105
Heating 103
– exterior mirrors 53
– seats 52
– steering wheel 54
Heating and ventilation 103
Heating while stopped 105
Heavy cargo, refer to
Stowing cargo 124
Height, refer to
Dimensions 215
Height adjustment
– seats 47
– steering wheel 54
"Help", Control Center 22
Help text on Control
Display 22
High beams 101
– bulb replacement 202
– headlamp flasher 101
– indicator lamp 13
Highs, refer to Tone
settings 150
High temperatures 122
Highway 137
Hills 123
Holders for beverage
cans 116
Home address 142, 143
Hood 194
Horn 11
Hydraulic Brake Assistant,
refer to DBC Dynamic
Brake Control 94
Hydraulic system,
brakes 197
Hydroplaning 123
I
Ice warning 81
iDrive, refer to
Control Center 17
Ignition 62
Ignition key 34
Ignition lock 62
– with Comfort Access 62
Illuminated vanity mirror 54
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
225
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Imitation leather, refer to
the Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Independent ventilation
– entering switch-on
times 110
– switching on and off 110
"Indep. ventil",
independent
ventilation 110
Index 218
Indicator/warning lamp
– airbags 99
– alarm system 42
– brakes 13
– coolant temperature 83
– DSC 93
– engine temperature 83
– fasten safety belt 51
– Flat Tire Monitor 96
– fog lamps 101
– reserve 86
Indicator and warning
lamps, overview 13
"Individual", automatic
climate control 108
Individual adjustments,
refer to Vehicle Memory,
Key Memory 56
Individual air
distribution 108
Individual button
assignment 17
– on steering wheel 54
Inflation pressure, tires 188
Inflation pressure
monitoring, refer to Flat
Tire Monitor 95
Info Display 12
Info menu 22
Information
– on country 135
– on current position 135
– on destination
location 135
"Information" for
navigation 135, 136
Information on travel
direction, refer to Voice
instructions 141
Infrared windshield, refer to
Entry/pass tags 126
Instrument cluster, refer to
Info Display 12
Instrument illumination,
refer to Instrument
lighting 101
Instrument lighting 101
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10, 14
Integrated universal remote
control 112
Interesting destination 136
Interior lamps 102
– remote control 36
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 53
Interior motion sensor 43
– switching off 43
Interior rearview mirror 53
Interlock, refer to Steering
locked 62
Intermittent operation,
wiper 72
J
Jacking points for vehicle
jack 205
Joystick, refer to Control
Center 17
Jumpering, refer to Jump-
starting 209
Jump-starting 209
K
Keyless Go, refer to
Comfort Access 37
Keyless opening and
closing, refer to
Comfort Access 37
Key Memory 56
Keys 34
– adapter for spare key 34
Kick-down 69
Knock control 187
L
Lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 100
Lamps and bulbs 201
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 125
"Last dest." for
navigation 136
"Last" for telephone 180
LATCH child-restraint
fixing 60
Leather care, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 204
"Left"
– for seat heating 52
– with the automatic climate
control 107
Length, refer to
Dimensions 215
Level control system 97
License plate lamp, bulb
replacement 203
Light alloy wheels, care,
refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Light-emitting diodes 204
Lighter 117, 118
Lighter socket 117
Lighting
– of instruments 101
– of vehicle 100
Lights on warning 100
Light switch 100
Limit 87
"Limit", refer to Setting
speed limit 88
"Limited Release",
Control Center 24
Lists in Control Display 19
Litter container 115
Load, refer to Loading 124
Loading, vehicle 124
Location
– CD changer 160
– DVD changer 165
– navigation drive 130
– telephone 176, 178
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
226
"Location" for naviga-
tion 135, 142, 143, 144
Lock buttons, doors, refer
to Engaging locks 39
Lock code 178
Locking, vehicle
– from inside 39
– from outside 36
Locking without key, refer
to Comfort Access 37
"LOGIC7" in audio
mode 150
Longlife oils 196
– specified engine oils 196
Low beams 100
– automatic 100
– indicator lamp, defective
lamp 83
Lower back support, refer
to Lumbar support 48
Low-fuel warning light,
refer to Fuel gauge 86
Lug bolts 205
Luggage compartment
– Comfort Access 37
– locking separately 40
– opening, remote
control 36
– opening/closing, refer to
Luggage compartment
lid 39
– opening from inside 40
– opening from outside 39
– remote control 36
– volume 216
Luggage compartment
lid 39
– Comfort Access 37
– emergency release, refer
to Manual
operation 40, 41
– indicator lamp 83
– locking separately 40
– manually unlocking 39
– opening, remote
control 36
– opening from inside 40
– opening from outside 39
– operation,
automatic 36, 41
– remote control 36
Luggage compartment
net 42
Luggage rack, refer to
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 125
Luggage strap 125
Lumbar support 47, 48
M
M+S tires, refer to
Winter tires 193
Maintenance 82
Maintenance System 198
Make-up mirror, refer to
Illuminated vanity
mirror 54
"MANUAL" for radio 153
Manual operation
– door lock 38
– driver's door 38
– glass roof, electric 45
– parking brake 66
– transmission interlock for
automatic transmission
with Steptronic 70
Manual release
– fuel filler door 186
– luggage compartment
lid 40
Manual station search 153
Manufacturer 5
Map
– changing scale 27, 135
– destination entry 135
"Map dir. travel" for
navigation 139, 140
"Map facing N." for
navigation 139, 140
Map facing north 139
Marking, tires 190
Master key 34
– with remote control 34
Maximum cooling 105
Maximum roof weight 216
"Memo" 90
Memo 90
"Memorize", automatic
climate control 108
"MEMORIZE" for radio 154
Memory, refer to
– Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 55
– Vehicle Memory,
Key Memory 56
MENU button 18
"MENU" for DVD mode 169
"Menu name",
Control Center 22
Menus, Control Display 21
Microfilter, automatic
climate control 108
Microphone for voice
command 177
Mirrors 53
– automatic curb
monitor 56
– dimming feature 53
– memory, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel
memory 55
– mirror heating 53
Missed calls, on Control
Display 181
"Missed" for telephone 181
Mobile service 182
Modifications, technical,
refer to For your own
safety 5
Monitor
– refer to Control Center 17
– refer to Control Center in
rear 24
Most recent portable phone
numbers 180
Multi-function steering
wheel 10, 16
Multi-function switch
– turn signals/headlamp
flasher 71
– wiper system 72
Multimedia monitor, refer to
Control Display 18
Music track,
sampling 158, 161
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
227
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
N
"Name" for navigation 133
"Navigation" 131
Navigation destination
– manual entry 132
– selecting from the
directory 134
– selecting via map 135
Navigation drive,
location 130
Navigation system 130
– address book 142
– adjusting volume 27, 141
– current position 143
– destination entry 132
– destination guidance in
assistance window 131
– destination list 137
– displaying route 139
– looking for interesting
destination 136
– manually entering
destination address 132
– navigation CD/DVD 130
– new route 140
– recent destinations 136
– route list 140
– selecting destination via
information 135
– selecting destination via
map 135
– selecting route
criteria 137
– starting destination
guidance 139
– switching off, refer to
Terminating/interrupting
destination guidance 142
– terminating/interrupting
destination guidance 142
– voice instructions 141
"Navi info.", function
button 54
Neck restraints, refer to
Head restraints 49
Nets 125
"New route" for
navigation 140
"Next"
– looking for interesting
destinations 136
– selecting destination via
map 135
"None Release",
Control Center 24
Notepad function 28
Notepad of voice command
system 28
Nozzles, refer to
Ventilation 106, 110
Nylon rope 210
O
OBD socket 200
Octane numbers, refer to
Fuel specifications 187
Odometer 81
– refer to Trip odometer 81
Oil
– additives, refer to
Diesel engine 196
– dipstick 195
– filling capacity 217
– specified engine oils 196
– viscosity ratings 196
Oil change intervals, refer
to Service requirement
display 82
Oil consumption 195
Oil filter change 217
Oil level 195
– indicator lamp 83
Oil pressure, indicator
lamp 83
Oil sensor, indicator
lamp 83
Oil temperature 83
"OK" for DVD mode 169
Onboard computer refer to
Control Center 17
Onboard tool kit 201
"On country" for
navigation 136
"1,2,3" 179
"On location" for
navigation 135
"On town/city" for
navigation 136
Opening and closing
– from inside 38
– from outside 35
– via door lock 38
– with remote control 35
Opening without key, refer
to Comfort Access 37
Oral note 28
Outside air 105
Outside air mode,
automatic climate
control 105
Outside temperature
display 81
– changing unit of
measure 89
Overview
– operating principle 10
– radio control 148
P
Panic mode 36
Park detent, refer to
Transmission lockout 69
Park Distance Control
PDC 91
Parking, vehicle 64
Parking aid, refer to PDC
Park Distance Control 91
Parking brake 64
– Automatic Hold 65
– manual operation 64
Parking lamps 100
– bulb replacement 202
Parking lamps/low
beams 100
"Parking lamps on!",
vehicle 85
Parking with Automatic
Hold 65
Parts and accessories,
refer to Your individual
vehicle 5
Passenger-side mirror tilt
function 56
Pathway lighting 100
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
228
PDC Park Distance
Control 91
"PDC pic.", vehicle 92
Pen tray 116
Permissible axle load, refer
to Weights 216
Permissible gross weight,
refer to Weights 216
"Perspective" for
navigation 139
Phone book 179
– deleting all entries 180
– dialing numbers using
voice command
system 180
– entering numbers in voice
command phone
book 179
– entry deletion 180
Phone number
– deleting 180
– deleting from list of
numbers 180
– dialing 178
– dialing from list of
numbers 179
– recent numbers 180
– refer to Portable
phone 178
– Top 8 180
"Pict. format" in DVD
mode 168
"Picture"
– audio mode 148
– DVD mode 168
– TV operation 164
Plastic, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Please fasten safety belt,
indicator lamp 13
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal
filter 108
Portable phone
– adjusting volume 177
– battery 175
– calling 178
– call termination 178
– codes 178
– controlling with the
buttons on the steering
wheel 16
– emergency call 177
– hands-free system 177
– missed calls 181
– operating via Control
Center 175
– operating with telephone
keypad, folding 176
– redialing 180
– refer to separate portable
phone Owner's Manual
– switching on/off 178
– Top 8 180
Power output, refer to
Engine specifications 214
Power rear backrests 48
Power seat 47, 48
Power windows 43, 44
– safety switch 44
Pressure, tires 188
Pressure monitoring,
tires 95
– Flat Tire Monitor 95
Producing tire inflation
pressure 188
Programmable cruise
control 73
Programming settings,
refer to Vehicle Memory,
Key Memory 56
Programs, refer to TV 163
Protective function
– glass roof, electric 45
– power windows 44
Publishers 2
Puncture, Flat Tire
Monitor 95
R
Radiator, refer to
Coolant 196
Radio 152
– adjusting tone 149
– Autostore 154
– briefly play station 153
– controls 148
– selecting the
waveband 152
– station search 153
– station selection 154
– storing station 154
– switching on/off 149
– volume 149
– Weather Band 155
Radio-control key, refer to
Master key with remote
control 34
Radio mode 62
– with Comfort Access 62
Rain sensor 72
Reading lamps 102
"Rear", Control Center 24
Rear, Control Center 24
Rear air conditioner 109
– activation and
deactivation in Control
Display 109
– air supply 109
– cooling adjustment 109
– switching off 109
Rear armrest, refer to
Center armrest 118
Rear backrests, power 48
Rear-compartment air
conditioning
– rear cooler 114
Rear cooler 114
Rear lamps 203
– bulb replacement 203
– indicator lamp, defective
lamp 83
– refer to Tail lamps 203
Rear lock 24
Rear-seat area
ventilation 106
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
229
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Rear seats
– adjusting 48
– adjusting passenger seat
from the rear 48
– head restraint
adjustment 50
– heating 52
Rear seats, power 48
Rear TV 24
Rearview mirror 53
Rear window blind, refer to
Sun blinds 113
Rear window defroster,
automatic climate
control 104
Rear window safety
switch 44
Recent destinations,
navigation 136
Reception
– radio station 152
– TV programs 163
"Recirc. air", function
button 54
Recirculated-air mode,
automatic climate
control 105
Recirculating air, refer to
Recirculated-air
mode 105
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest tilt 47, 48
Redialing list, display
persons not reached 180
Refueling 186
– fuel filler door 186
"Release",
Control Center 24
Releasing
– from outside 36
– luggage compartment
lid 36, 37
Remaining distance, refer
to Cruising range 86
Remaining distance for
service 82, 83
Remote control 34
– changing battery 37
– Comfort Access 37
– garage door opener 112
– luggage compartment
lid 36
– malfunctions 37
Replacement fuses 207
Replacement keys 34
Replacement of tires
– changing wheels 204
– tire replacement 192
Replacement tire 205
Replacing lamps, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 201
Replacing light bulbs 201
Replacing tires 192
Replacing windshield
wipers 201
Reservoir, washer
system 73
Reset, resetting tone
settings 151
"RESET" in audio mode 151
Residual heat 105
Restraint systems
– for children 58
– refer to Safety belts 51
Returning to starting
point 143
Reverse
– CD 159, 162
– DVD 167
Reverse gear, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 69
"Right"
– for seat heating 52
– with the automatic climate
control 107
"RND"
– CD changer 161
– CD player 158
Road map 135
"Roadside Assistance",
BMW Assist 182
Rod antenna, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Roller sun blind, refer to
Sun blinds 113
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 125
Rope, refer to Having
vehicle towed 210
Route
– altering 140
– displaying 139
– displaying map 139
– list 140
– new 140
– selecting 137
– selecting criteria 137
"Route" for
navigation 139, 140
"Route guid." for
navigation 139, 142
Route instruction, refer to
Voice instructions 141
"Route selec." for
navigation 137
"RPA", vehicle 96
RSC Run-flat System
Component, refer to
Run-flat tires 206
Run-flat System
Component RSC, refer to
Run-flat tires 206
Run-flat tires 192
– flat tire 206
– tire inflation pressure 188
– tire replacement 192, 193
– winter tires 193
S
Safety belts 51
– care, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
– sitting safely 46
– warning lamp 13, 51
Safety belt tensioners, refer
to Safety belts 51
Safety systems, refer to
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 92
– Brake system 94
– DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 93
Safety tires, refer to
Run-flat tires 206
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
230
Sampling, Scan
– CD 158, 161
– radio 153
SAT, waveband 155
"SCAN"
– CD changer 161
– CD player 158
– radio 153
Scan
– CD changer 161
– CD player 158
– radio 153
Scan, sampling
– CD changer 161
– CD player 158
– radio 153
Screen, refer to Control
Display 18
Screwdriver, refer to
Onboard tool kit 201
Searching for music track,
CD 158, 161
Seat adjustment
– electric 47, 48
– electric, BMW sports
seat 48
Seats 47
– heating 52
– memory, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel
memory 55
"Seat temp." for seat
heating 52
Seat ventilation, refer to
Active seat ventilation 52
Securing cargo, refer to
Loading 125
Securing luggage 125
Select functions 17
Selecting audio source 152
Selecting menu 21
Selecting roaming 23
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 68
Selector lever interlock,
refer to Shiftlock 69
Selector-lever positions,
automatic transmission
with Steptronic 68
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 182
"Service", vehicle 82
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for
US models 198
Service Interval Display,
refer to Service
requirement
display 82, 198
Service Mobile, refer to
Roadside Assistance 182
Service requirement
display 82, 198
"SET", refer to Setting
speed limit 88
"Set time 1", independent
ventilation 110
"Set time 2", independent
ventilation 110
Setting button, refer to
Controller 17
"Settings"
– comfort mode 95
– Control Center 24
– function button 54
– Sport program 95
Settings
– data and time 90
– language 89
– screen display 22
– units of measure 89
Setting time, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
time 110
Setting time and date 90
Shifting, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 68
Shiftlock, refer to Engaging
selector lever position 68
Short commands for voice
command system 29
Shortest route 137
"Shortest route" for
navigation 137
Shoulder support 48
Side airbags 98
Side-mounted turn signals,
bulb replacement 202
Side window blind, refer to
Sun blinds 113
Sitting safely 46
– with airbags 46
– with safety belts 46
Ski bag 118
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 44
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 117
Snow chains 193
Socket, refer to Lighter
socket 117
Socket for onboard
diagnosis 200
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft
closing 39, 40
Spare fuses 207
Spare key 34
– adapter 34
Spare tire 205
Special oils, refer to
Specified engine oils 196
Special washing program,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Specified engine oils 196
Speed
– average 86
– limit 87
Speed-dependent
volume 150
Speed limit 87
– "Limit" 88
Speed limit "ON/OFF" 88
Speedometer 12
"Speed Vol." in audio
mode 150
Sport program
– automatic transmission
with Steptronic 70
– vehicle 95
Sports characteristic 95
Sports seat 48
Stability control, refer to
– Driving stability control 93
– DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 93
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
231
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Standing lamps 101
– bulb replacement 202
Start/Stop button 62
Starting, refer to Starting
engine 63
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump-starting 209
Starting engine 63
Starting problems
– jump-starting 209
– temperature 63
Start menu 18
Station, refer to Radio 152
Status lines in Control
Center 23
Steering wheel 16
– adjustment 54
– adjustment, automatic 54
– heater 54
– individual button
assignment 54
– memory 55
– with multi-function
buttons 16
Steptronic, refer to Manual
mode 70
Stopwatch
– intermediate time 88
– starting and stopping 88
Storage, tires 193
Storage
compartments 115, 116
Storage space, refer to
Luggage compartment 42
Storing current
position 143
Storing desired speeds,
refer to Programmable
cruise control 74
Storing destination per
voice 142
Storing numbers, refer to
Phone book 179
Storing programs, TV 163
Storing seat adjustment 55
Storing sitting position,
refer to Seat, mirror and
steering wheel
memory 55
Storing stations, radio 153
Storing vehicle, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Straps, refer to
Loading 124
"SUBTITLE" for DVD
mode 169
Summer tires, refer to
Wheels and tires 188
Sun blinds 113
Sun visors 113
Surface ice, refer to
Ice warning 81
Switches, refer to
Cockpit 10, 14
Switch for battery 207
Switching air conditioner
mode on and off
manually 105
Switching between
calls 179
Switching navigation voice
instructions on/off 141
Switching off engine 63
Switching off portable
phone 178
Switching on
– audio 149
– CD changer 160
– CD player 158
– DVD changer 166
– portable phone 178
– radio 152
– TV 163
"Switch. time 1",
independent
ventilation 111
"Switch. time 2",
independent
ventilation 111
Symbols,
Control Center 19
T
Tachometer 81
Tail lamps, bulb
replacement 203
Taking time, refer to
Stopwatch 88
Tank contents, refer to
Fuel tank capacity 217
Target cursor for
navigation 135
Technical data 214
Technical modifications 5
Telephone 174
– accepting calls 16, 176
– dialing phone number 178
– entering lock code 178
– hands-free mode 177
– phone book 179
– redialing 180
– switching off 176, 178
– Top 8 180
Television, refer to TV 163
Temperature 122
– automatic climate
control 105
– changing unit of
measure 89
Temperature display
– ice warning 81
– interior temperature 105
– outside temperature 81
– setting units 89
Tempomat, refer to
– Cruise control 75
– Programmable cruise
control 73
The right tires 192
Thigh support
adjustment 47
Third brake lamp
– bulb replacement 203
– refer to Brake lamps 203
Three-point belt 51
Through loading
system 118
Tightening torque, refer to
Tightening lug bolts 205
Tilt alarm sensor
– remote control 43
– switching off 43
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
232
Tilt function, passenger-
side mirror 56
"Time" 90
Time
– display format 89
– setting 90
Time of arrival 87
Timer 87
"Tint" in TV mode 164
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 95
Tire Quality Grading 190
Tires
– age 190
– break-in 122
– changing 204
– condition 191
– damage 191
– flat tire 204
– inflation pressure 188
– replacing 192
– run-flat tires 192
– size 190
– storage 193
– tread 191
– tread depth indicators,
refer to Tire tread/
damage 191
– winter tires 193
Tires with emergency-
running characteristics,
refer to Run-flat tires 206
"TITLE" in DVD mode 167
Tone 148
– adjusting 149
– mid-range setting 151
"Tone" in audio
mode 148, 150
Tools, refer to Onboard
tool kit 201
"TOP 8" for telephone 180
Top 8 for telephone
– dialing phone number 180
– on Control Display 180
– sorting entries 180
"TOP" in DVD mode 169
Torque 214
– lug bolts 205
Tow bar 211
Tow fittings 210
Towing 210
Town/city
– entering 133
– selecting 134
Tow rope 211
Tow sockets for tow
fitting 210
Track, refer to
Dimensions 215
Tracks, random
sequence 158, 161
Transmission, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 68
Transmission fault 70
Transmission interlock,
manually releasing 70
Transmission lockout, refer
to P Park 69
Transporting children
safely 58
Transport securing
device 125
Tray for pens 116
Tread depth, refer to
Tire tread 191
Tread depth indicators in
tires, refer to Tire
tread 191
Treble, refer to Adjusting
tone 149
"Treble" in audio mode 150
Trip odometer 81
Trunk, refer to Luggage
compartment 42
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 39
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 215
Turn signals 71
– bulb
replacement 202, 203
– indicator lamp 13
– side-mounted, bulb
replacement 202
TV 163
– adjusting picture 164
– adjusting tone 149
– controls 148
– selecting 163
– selecting programs 163
– selecting standard 164
– storing programs 163
– switching on 149
– volume 149
"TV" during TV
operation 163
"TV format" 164
Twist-and-press button,
refer to Controller 17
U
Undercoating, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading 190
Unintentional alarm 43
Units of measure
– average speed 89
– consumption 89
– distance 89
– temperature 89
Universal garage door
control 112
Universal remote
control 112
Unlocking
– from inside 38
– hood 194
Unlocking and locking
doors
– from inside 38
– from outside 35
Unlocking without key,
refer to Comfort
Access 37
Used batteries, refer to
Disposal 207
Using antifreeze 196
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Reference
233
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
V
Valve
– screw caps 206
– stem 206
Vanity mirror,
illuminated 54
Vehicle
– adjustments 56
– battery 207
– break-in 122
– care, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
– dimensions 215
– identification number 195
– loading 124
– parking 64
– storage, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
– washing, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
– weight 216
Vehicle jack 204
Vehicle position, refer to
Current position 143
Ventilation 106
– draft-free 106
– while parked 110
Video, refer to
DVD changer 165
"Video", video
mode 148, 163
"View" for
navigation 139, 140
Viscosity 196
Voice-command phone
book 179
Voice command system 26
Voice instructions
– muting 141
– repeating 141
– switching on/off 141
– volume 141
Volume 149
– adjusting speed-
dependent 150
– portable phone 177
– voice command
system 27
– voice instructions 141
Volume, trunk 216
Volume balance
– front/rear 150
– right/left 150
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warnings, refer to
Check Control 83
Warning triangle 209
Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 198
Washer fluid 73
– reservoir, capacity 73
Washer fluid reservoir, refer
to Windshield/headlamp
washer system 73
Washer jets, refer to
Windshield washer
nozzles 72
Washer system 73
Washing the vehicle, refer
to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Waste container, refer to
Ashtray 117
Waveband 152
"WB"
– audio mode 148
– in radio mode 155
WB, waveband 155
Weather Band 155
Weights 216
Wheel/tire combination 192
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 215
Wheel bolt wrench 204
– spare tire 204
Wheel-changing set 204
– run-flat tires 206
– spare tire 205
Wheel chock 204
Wheels and tires 188
Wheelslip control, refer to
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 93
Width, refer to
Dimensions 215
Windows, convenience
operation 36, 38
Windshield washer
– washer fluid 73
Windshield washer fluid
tank 73
– capacity, refer to Filling
capacities 217
Windshield washer
nozzles 72
Windshield washer
reservoir 73
Windshield washing
system, wiper system 72
Windshield wiper, refer to
Wiper system 72
Windshield wiper blades
– care, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
– replacing 201
Winter tires 193
– changing 204
– condition 191
– run-flat tires 193
– storage 193
Wiper blade
replacement 73
Wiper system 72
"With highway" for
navigation 137
"With map" for
navigation 135
Without highway 137
Wood decoration, refer to
the Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Wordmatch principle for
navigation 138
Working in the engine
compartment 194
Wrench, refer to Onboard
tool kit 201
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
Refueling
To ensure that you always have all the
essential data at hand when refueling, we
recommend that you fill in the following
tables with the specifications and informa-
tion that apply to your vehicle. Consult the
index for individual specifications.
Fuel
Engine oil
The oil quantity between the two marks
on the dipstick is approx. 1.65 US quarts/
1.5 liter.
Tire inflation pressures
Designation
Please enter your preferred fuel here.
Quality
Summer tires
Front
Rear
Winter tires
Front
Rear
Up to 4 persons
5 persons or 4 plus luggage
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
01 41 0 159 154 ue
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
7 US-En
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 154 - © 09/04 BMW AG
